Part Number Hot Search : 
D1260 B1319 GLM50A LT1140CS HW3100 PCR1206 11P24 2SD928
Product Description
Full Text Search
 

To Download TMP86FH46ANG Datasheet File

  If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .  
 
 


  Datasheet File OCR Text:
  8 bit microcontroller tlcs-870/c series TMP86FH46ANG
page 2 TMP86FH46ANG the information contained herein is su bject to change without notice. 021023 _ d toshiba is continually working to improve the qual ity and reliability of its products. nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fa il due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. it is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing toshiba products , to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such toshiba products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. in developing your designs, please ensure that to shiba products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most re cent toshiba products specifications. also, please keep in mind the precautio ns and conditions set forth in the ? handling guide for semiconductor devices, ? or ? toshiba semiconductor reliability handbook ? etc. 021023_a the toshiba products listed in this document are inte nded for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). these toshiba products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunction or failure of which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury ( ? unintended usage ? ). unintended usage include atomic energy control instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, tr ansportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instrument s, all types of safety devices, etc. unintended usage of toshiba products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_b the products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohib ited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_q the information contained he rein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. no responsibility is assumed by tosh iba for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. no license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of toshiba or others. 021023_c the products described in this document may include products subject to the foreign exchange and foreign trade laws. 021023_f for a discussion of how the reliability of microcontro llers can be predicted, please refer to section 1.3 of the chapter entitled quality and reli ability assurance/hand ling precautions. 030619_s ? 2006 toshiba corporation all rights reserved
page 3 TMP86FH46ANG difference among produc t (tmp86xx46 series) note 1: the products with flash memory (86fh46,86fh46a) contai n the flash control register (flscr) at 0fffh in the dbr area. the products with mask rom or otp and the emul ation chip do not have the flscr register. in these devices,therefore, a program that accesses the flscr register cannot function properly (executes differently as in the case of a flash product). note 2: the txd and rxd pins to be used in serial prom mode differ between the 86fh46 and the 86fh46a. take this into con- sideration in your board design when you replace the produc t. details of the function refer to the chapter of the 86fh46,86fh46a data sheet. 86c846 86ch46 86ch46a 86cm46 86cm46a 86ph46 86pm46 86pm46a 86fh46 86fh46a rom 8192bytes (mask) 16384bytes (mask) 32768bytes (mask) 16384bytes (otp) 32768bytes (otp) 16384bytes (flash) ram 512bytes 512bytes 1024bytes 512by tes 1024bytes 512bytes 512bytes dbr(note1) 128bytes (flash control register contained) i/o 33pins large current output 19pins (led direct drive) interrupt 18interrupt sources (external : 6 internal : 12) timer counter 1 6 - b i t t i m e r c o u n t e r : 1 c h 8-bit timer counter : 2ch uart 8-bit uart : 1ch sio high-speed sio : 1ch key-on wakeup 4ch 10-bit ad converter analog-input : 8ch structure of test pin terminal for serial prom mode(note2) boot1/rxd(p10) boot2/txd(p11) boot/rxd(p02) txd(p03) emulation chip tmp86c947xb package p-sdip42-600-1.78 vdd r in r r without pull down resister without protect diode on the vdd side vdd r in r r vdd without pull down resister
TMP86FH46ANG difference among produc t (tmp86xx47 series) note 1: the products with flash memory (86fh47,86fh47a) contai n the flash control register (flscr) at 0fffh in the dbr area. the products with mask rom or otp and the emul ation chip do not have the flscr register. in these devices,therefore, a program that accesses the flscr register cannot function properly (executes differently as in the case of a flash product). note 2: the txd and rxd pins to be used in serial prom mode differ between the 86fh47 and the 86fh47a. take this into con- sideration in your board design when you replace the produc t. details of the function refer to the chapter of the 86fh47,86fh47a data sheet. 86c847 86ch47 86ch47a 86cm47 86cm47a 86ph47 86pm47 86pm47a 86fh47 86fh47a rom 8192bytes (mask) 16384bytes (mask) 32768bytes (mask) 16384bytes (otp) 32768bytes (otp) 16384bytes (flash) ram 512bytes 512bytes 1024bytes 512by tes 1024bytes 512bytes 512bytes dbr(note1) 128bytes (flash control register contained) i/o 35pins large current output 19pins (led direct drive) interrupt 18interrupt sources (external : 6 internal : 12) timer counter 1 6 - b i t t i m e r c o u n t e r : 1 c h 8-bit timer counter : 2ch uart 8-bit uart : 1ch sio high-speed sio : 1ch key-on wakeup 4ch 10-bit ad converter analog-input : 8ch structure of test pin terminal for serial prom mode(note2) boot1/rxd(p10) boot2/txd(p11) boot/rxd(p02) txd(p03) emulation chip tmp86c947xb package (p-lqfp44-1010- 0.80a) available available (86ch47) available n.a. available available n.a. package (p-lqfp44-1010- 0.80b) n.a. available (86ch47a) n.a. available n.a. n.a. available vdd r in r r without pull down resister without protect diode on the vdd side vdd r in r r vdd without pull down resister
page 5 TMP86FH46ANG differences in electrical ch aracteristics (tmp86xx46 series) note 1: with the 86ch46a,ph46 the operating temperature (topr) is -20 to 85 when the supply voltage vdd is less than 2.0v. note 2: with the 86fh46a, the operating temperature (topr) is -20 to 85 when the supply voltage vdd is less than 3.0v. note 3: with the 86fh46a, when a program is executing in the fl ash memory or when data is being read from the flash memory, the flash memory operates in an intermittent manner causi ng peak currents in the flash memory momentarily, as shown in figure. in this case, the supply current idd(in norm al1,normal2 and slow1 mode) is defined as the sum of the average peak current and mcu current. 86c846 / 86ch46 / 86cm46 86cm46a 86pm46 86ph46 86ch46a 86fh46 86fh46a operat- ing con- dition (mcu mode) read/ fetch (a) 1.8v to 5.5v (-40 to 85 ) (a) 2.0v to 5.5v (-40 to 85 ) (b) 1.8v to 2.0v (-20 to 85 ) (a) 2.7v to 5.5v (-40 to 85 ) (a) 3.0v to 5.5v (-40 to 85 ) (b) 2.7v to 3.0v (-20 to 85 ) erase/ pro- gram (a) 4.5v to 5.5v (-10 to 40 ) operating condition (serial prom mode) (a) 4.5v to 5.5v (20 to 30 ) (a) 4.5v to 5.5v (-10 to 40 ) operating current operating current varies with each product. for details, refe r to the datacheet (electrical chracteristics) of each product. (note3) 5.5 4.5 2.7 1.8 0.030 0.034 1 4.2 8 16 [mhz] [v] (a) 5.5 4.5 2.7 1.8 2.0 0.030 0.034 1 4.2 8 16 [mhz] [v] (a) (b) (note1) 5.5 4.5 2.7 1.8 0.030 0.034 1 4.2 8 16 [mhz] [v] (a) 5.5 4.5 3.0 2.7 1.8 0.030 0.034 1 4.2 8 16 (a) (b) (note2) [mhz] [v] 5.5 4.5 2.7 1.8 0.030 0.034 1 4.2 8 16 [mhz] [v] (a) 5.5 4.5 2.7 1.8 0.030 0.034 2 4 8 16 [mhz] [v] (a) 5.5 4.5 2.7 1.8 0.030 0.034 2 4.2 8 16 [mhz] [v] (a) n program counter (pc) n+1 n+2 n+3 1 machine cycle (4/fc or 4/fs) mcu current i [ma] ddp-p typ. current momentary flash current max. current sum of average momentary flash current and mcu curren t intermittent operat ion of flash memory
TMP86FH46ANG differences in electrical ch aracteristics (tmp86xx47 series) note 1: with the 86ch47a, ph47 the operating temperature (topr) is -20 to 85 when the supply voltage vdd is less than 2.0v. note 2: with the 86fh47a, the operating temperature (topr) is -20 to 85 when the supply voltage vdd is less than 3.0v. note 3: with the 86fh47a, when a program is executing in the fl ash memory or when data is being read from the flash memory, the flash memory operates in an intermittent manner causi ng peak currents in the flash memory momentarily, as shown in figure. in this case, the supply current idd(in norm al1,normal2 and slow1 mode) is defined as the sum of the average peak current and mcu current. 86c847 / 86ch47 / 86cm47 86cm47a 86pm47 86ph47 86ch47a 86fh47 86fh47a operat- ing con- dition (mcu mode) read/ fetch (a) 1.8v to 5.5v (-40 to 85 ) (a) 2.0v to 5.5v (-40 to 85 ) (b) 1.8v to 2.0v (-20 to 85 ) (a) 2.7v to 5.5v (-40 to 85 ) (a) 3.0v to 5.5v (-40 to 85 ) (b) 2.7v to 3.0v (-20 to 85 ) erase/ pro- gram (a) 4.5v to 5.5v (-10 to 40 ) operating condition (serial prom mode) (a) 4.5v to 5.5v (20 to 30 ) (a) 4.5v to 5.5v (-10 to 40 ) operating current operating current varies with each product. for details, refe r to the datacheet (electrical chracteristics) of each product. (note3) 5.5 4.5 2.7 1.8 0.030 0.034 1 4.2 8 16 [mhz] [v] (a) 5.5 4.5 2.7 1.8 2.0 0.030 0.034 1 4.2 8 16 [mhz] [v] (a) (b) (note1) 5.5 4.5 2.7 1.8 0.030 0.034 1 4.2 8 16 [mhz] [v] (a) 5.5 4.5 3.0 2.7 1.8 0.030 0.034 1 4.2 8 16 (a) (b) (note2) [mhz] [v] 5.5 4.5 2.7 1.8 0.030 0.034 1 4.2 8 16 [mhz] [v] (a) 5.5 4.5 2.7 1.8 0.030 0.034 2 4 8 16 [mhz] [v] (a) 5.5 4.5 2.7 1.8 0.030 0.034 2 4.2 8 16 [mhz] [v] (a) n program counter (pc) n+1 n+2 n+3 1 machine cycle (4/fc or 4/fs) mcu current i [ma] ddp-p typ. current momentary flash current max. current sum of average momentary flash current and mcu curren t intermittent operat ion of flash memory
revision history date revision 2006/2/23 1 first release 2006/3/13 2 contents revised 2006/6/29 3 periodical updating.no change in contents. 2006/10/8 4 contents revised

i table of contents difference among product (tmp86xx46 series) TMP86FH46ANG 1.1 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.3 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.4 pin names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2. operational description 2.1 cpu core functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2.1.1 memory address map ............................................................................................................................... 7 2.1.2 program memory (flash) .......................................................................................................................... 7 2.1.3 data memory (ram) ............................................................................................................................... .. 7 2.2 system clock controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.2.1 clock generator ............................................................................................................................... ......... 8 2.2.2 timing generator ............................................................................................................................... ..... 10 2.2.2.1 configuration of timing generator 2.2.2.2 machine cycle 2.2.3 operation mode control circuit .............................................................................................................. 11 2.2.3.1 single-clock mode 2.2.3.2 dual-clock mode 2.2.3.3 stop mode 2.2.4 operating mode control ......................................................................................................................... 16 2.2.4.1 stop mode 2.2.4.2 idle1/2 mode and sleep1/2 mode 2.2.4.3 idle0 and sleep0 modes (idle0, sleep0) 2.2.4.4 slow mode 2.3 reset circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 2.3.1 external reset input ............................................................................................................................... 29 2.3.2 address trap reset ............................................................................................................................... ... 30 2.3.3 watchdog timer reset .............................................................................................................................. 30 2.3.4 system clock reset ............................................................................................................................... ... 30 3. interrupt control circuit 3.1 interrupt latches (il15 to il2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 3.2 interrupt enable register (eir) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 3.2.1 interrupt master enable flag (imf) .......................................................................................................... 34 3.2.2 individual interrupt enable flags (ef15 to ef4) ...................................................................................... 34 3.3 interrupt source selector (intsel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 3.4 interrupt sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 3.4.1 interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows. ....................................................................... 37 3.4.2 saving/restoring general-purpose registers ............................................................................................ 38 3.4.2.1 using push and pop instructions
ii 3.4.2.2 using data transfer instructions 3.4.3 interrupt return ............................................................................................................................... ......... 40 3.5 software interrupt (intsw) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 3.5.1 address error detection .......................................................................................................................... 41 3.5.2 debugging ............................................................................................................................... ............... 41 3.6 undefined instruction interrupt (intundef) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 3.7 address trap interrupt (intatrap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 3.8 external interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 4. special function r egister (sfr) 4.1 sfr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 4.2 dbr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 5. time base timer (tbt) 5.1 time base timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 5.1.1 configuration ............................................................................................................................... ........... 49 5.1.2 control ............................................................................................................................... ..................... 49 5.1.3 function ............................................................................................................................... ................... 50 5.2 divider output (dvo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 5.2.1 configuration ............................................................................................................................... ........... 51 5.2.2 control ............................................................................................................................... ..................... 51 6. watchdog timer (wdt) 6.1 watchdog timer configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 6.2 watchdog timer control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 6.2.1 malfunction detection methods using the watchdog timer ................................................................... 54 6.2.2 watchdog timer enable ......................................................................................................................... 55 6.2.3 watchdog timer disable ........................................................................................................................ 56 6.2.4 watchdog timer interrupt (intwdt) ...................................................................................................... 56 6.2.5 watchdog timer reset ........................................................................................................................... 57 6.3 address trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 6.3.1 selection of address trap in internal ram (atas) ................................................................................ 58 6.3.2 selection of operation at address trap (atout) .................................................................................. 58 6.3.3 address trap interrupt (intatrap) ....................................................................................................... 58 6.3.4 address trap reset ............................................................................................................................... . 59 7. i/o ports 7.1 port p0 (p07 to p00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 7.2 port p1 (p15 to p10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 7.3 port p2 (p22 to p20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 7.4 port p3 (p37 to p30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 7.5 port p4 (p47 to p40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 8. 16-bit timercounter 1 (tc1) 8.1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
iii 8.2 timercounter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 8.3 function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 8.3.1 timer mode ............................................................................................................................... .............. 70 8.3.2 external trigger timer mode .................................................................................................................. 72 8.3.3 event counter mode ............................................................................................................................... 74 8.3.4 window mode ............................................................................................................................... .......... 75 8.3.5 pulse width measurement mode ............................................................................................................ 76 8.3.6 programmable pulse generate (ppg) output mode ............................................................................. 79 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 9.2 timercounter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 9.3 function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 9.3.1 8-bit timer mode (tc3 and 4) ................................................................................................................ 89 9.3.2 8-bit event counter mode (tc3, 4) ........................................................................................................ 90 9.3.3 8-bit programmable divider ou tput (pdo) mode (tc3, 4) ..................................................................... 90 9.3.4 8-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output mode (tc3, 4) .................................................................. 93 9.3.5 16-bit timer mode (tc3 and 4) .............................................................................................................. 95 9.3.6 16-bit event counter mode (tc3 and 4) ................................................................................................ 96 9.3.7 16-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output mode (tc3 and 4) .......................................................... 96 9.3.8 16-bit programmable pulse generate (ppg) output mode (tc3 and 4) ............................................... 99 9.3.9 warm-up counter mode ....................................................................................................................... 101 9.3.9.1 low-frequency warm-up counter mode (normal1 normal2 slow2 slow1) 9.3.9.2 high-frequency warm-up counter mode (slow1 slow2 normal2 normal1) 10. synchronous serial interface (sio) 10.1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 10.2 control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 10.3 function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 10.3.1 serial clock ............................................................................................................................... .......... 106 10.3.1.1 clock source 10.3.1.2 shift edge 10.3.2 transfer bit direction ........................................................................................................................... 108 10.3.2.1 transmit mode 10.3.2.2 receive mode 10.3.2.3 transmit/receive mode 10.3.3 transfer modes ............................................................................................................................... .... 109 10.3.3.1 transmit mode 10.3.3.2 receive mode 10.3.3.3 transmit/receive mode 11. asynchronous serial interface (uart ) 11.1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 11.2 control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 11.3 transfer data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 11.4 transfer rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 11.5 data sampling method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 11.6 stop bit length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 11.7 parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 11.8 transmit/receive operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 11.8.1 data transmit operation .................................................................................................................... 126 11.8.2 data receive operation ..................................................................................................................... 126
iv 11.9 status flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 11.9.1 parity error ............................................................................................................................... ........... 127 11.9.2 framing error ............................................................................................................................... ....... 127 11.9.3 overrun error ............................................................................................................................... ....... 127 11.9.4 receive data buffer full ..................................................................................................................... 128 11.9.5 transmit data buffer empty ............................................................................................................... 128 11.9.6 transmit end flag .............................................................................................................................. 129 12. 10-bit ad converter (adc) 12.1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 12.2 register configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 12.3 function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 12.3.1 software start mode ........................................................................................................................... 135 12.3.2 repeat mode ............................................................................................................................... ....... 135 12.3.3 register setting ............................................................................................................................... . 136 12.4 stop/slow modes during ad conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 12.5 analog input voltage and ad conversion result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 12.6 precautions about ad converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 12.6.1 analog input pin voltage range ........................................................................................................... 139 12.6.2 analog input shared pins .................................................................................................................... 139 12.6.3 noise countermeasure ....................................................................................................................... 139 13. key-on wakeup (kwu) 13.1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 13.2 control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 13.3 function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 14. flash memory 14.1 flash memory control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 14.1.1 flash memory command sequence execution control (flscr) ..................................... 144 14.1.1 .................................................................................................................... ........................................ 144 14.1.2 flash memory standby control (flsstb) ............................................................................ 144 14.2 command sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 14.2.1 byte program ............................................................................................................................... ....... 146 14.2.2 sector erase (4-kbyte erase) ............................................................................................................. 146 14.2.3 chip erase (all erase) ........................................................................................................................ 147 14.2.4 product id entry ............................................................................................................................... .. 147 14.2.5 product id exit ............................................................................................................................... ..... 147 14.2.6 read protect ............................................................................................................................... ........ 147 14.3 toggle bit (d6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 14.4 access to the flash memory area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 14.4.1 flash memory control in the serial prom mode ............................................................................... 149 14.4.1.1 how to write to the flash memory by executing the contro l program in the ram area (in the ram loader mode within the serial prom mode) 14.4.2 flash memory control in the mcu mode ............................................................................................ 151 14.4.2.1 how to write to the flash memory by executing a user write control program in the ram area (in the mcu mode) 15. serial prom mode 15.1 outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
v 15.2 memory mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 15.3 serial prom mode setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 15.3.1 serial prom mode control pins ........................................................................................................ 154 15.3.2 pin function ............................................................................................................................... ......... 154 15.3.3 example connection for on-board writing ......................................................................................... 155 15.3.4 activating the serial prom mode ...................................................................................................... 156 15.4 interface specifications for uart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 15.5 operation command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 15.6 operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 15.6.1 flash memory erasing mode (operating command: f0h) ................................................................. 161 15.6.2 flash memory writing mode (operation command: 30h) .................................................................. 163 15.6.3 ram loader mode (operation command: 60h) ................................................................................ 166 15.6.4 flash memory sum output mode (operation command: 90h) ......................................................... 168 15.6.5 product id code output mode (operation command: c0h) .............................................................. 169 15.6.6 flash memory status output mode (operation command: c3h) ...................................................... 171 15.6.7 flash memory read protection setting mode (operation command: fah) ...................................... 172 15.7 error code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 15.8 checksum (sum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 15.8.1 calculation method ............................................................................................................................. 1 74 15.8.2 calculation data ............................................................................................................................... ... 175 15.9 intel hex format (binary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 15.10 passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 15.10.1 password string ............................................................................................................................... . 177 15.10.2 handling of password error .............................................................................................................. 177 15.10.3 password management during program development .................................................................... 177 15.11 product id code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 15.12 flash memory status code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 15.13 specifying the erasure area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 15.14 port input control register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 15.15 flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 15.16 uart timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 16. input/output circuitry 16.1 control pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 16.2 input/output ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 17. electrical characteristics 17.1 absolute maximum ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 17.2 recommended operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 17.2.1 serial prom mode ............................................................................................................................. 1 88 17.2.2 mcu mode (except flash pr ogramming or erasing) ......................................................................... 188 17.2.3 mcu mode (flash programming or erasing) ..................................................................................... 189 17.3 dc characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 17.4 ad characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 17.5 ac characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 17.6 flash characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 17.6.1 write characteristics ........................................................................................................................... 194 17.7 recommended oscillating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 17.8 handling precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
vi 18. package dimension this is a technical docu ment that describes the operat ing functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit microc ontroller series tlcs-870/c (lsi).
page 1 060116ebp TMP86FH46ANG cmos 8-bit microcontroller ? the information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023_d ? toshiba is continually working to improve the quality and reli ability of its products. neverthel ess, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent el ectrical sensitivity and vul nerability to physical stre ss. it is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing toshiba products, to comply with the standards of sa fety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such toshiba products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. in developing your designs, pleas e ensure that toshiba products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most recent toshiba products specifications. also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the ?handling gui de for semiconductor devices,? or ?toshiba se miconductor reliability handbook? etc. 021023_a ? the toshiba products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applic ations (computer, personal eq uip- ment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). these toshiba products are neithe r intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extr aordinarily high quality and/or re liability or a malfunctionor failure of which may cause loss of human life or bod ily injury (?unintended usage?). unintended us age include atomic energy control instru ments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transporta tion instruments, traffic signal instrume nts, combustion control instruments, medi cal instru- ments, all types of safety dev ices, etc. unintended usage of toshiba products li sted in this document shall be made at the cust omer's own risk. 021023_b ? the products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and /or sale are prohibited under any appl icable laws and regulations. 060106_q ? the information contained herein is present ed only as a guide for the applications of our products. no responsibility is assum ed by toshiba for any infringements of patents or other rights of the th ird parties which may result from its use. no license is gran ted by impli- cation or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of toshiba or others. 021023_c ? the products described in this document are subjec t to the foreign exchange and foreign trade laws. 021023_e ? for a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers c an be predicted, please refer to section 1.3 of the chapter entit led quality and reliability assurance/h andling precautions. 030619_s this product uses the super flash ? technology under the licence of silicon storage technology, inc. super flash ? is registered trademark of silicon storage technology, inc. TMP86FH46ANG the TMP86FH46ANG is a single-chip 8-bit high-speed and high-functionality microcomputer incorporating 16384 bytes of flash memory. it is pin-compatible with the tmp86ch46ang/tmp86c846ng (mask rom ver- sion). the TMP86FH46ANG can realize operations equi valent to those of the tmp86ch46ang/tmp86c846ng by programming the on-chip flash memory. 1.1 features 1. 8-bit single chip microcomputer tlcs-870/c series - instruction execution time : 0.25 s (at 16 mhz) 122 s (at 32.768 khz) - 132 types & 731 basic instructions 2. 18interrupt sources (external : 6 internal : 12) 3. input / output ports (33 pins) large current output: 19pins (typ. 20ma), led direct drive 4. prescaler - time base timer - divider output function 5. watchdog timer 6. 16-bit timer counter: 1 ch - timer, external trigger, wi ndow, pulse width measurement, event counter, programmable pulse generate (ppg) modes 7. 8-bit timer counter : 2 ch - timer, event counter, programmable divider output (pdo), product no. rom (flash) ram package maskrom mcu emulation chip TMP86FH46ANG 16384 bytes 512 bytes p-sdip42-600-1.78 tmp86ch46ang/ tmp86c846ng tmp86c947xb
page 2 1.1 features TMP86FH46ANG pulse width modulation (pwm) output, programmable pulse generation (ppg) modes 8. high-speed sio: 1ch 9. 8-bit uart : 1 ch 10. 10-bit successive approximation type ad converter - analog input: 8 ch 11. key-on wakeup : 4 ch 12. clock operation single clock mode dual clock mode 13. low power consumption operation stop mode: oscillation stops. (battery/capacitor back-up.) slow1 mode: low power consumption operation usin g low-frequency clock.(high-frequency clock stop.) slow2 mode: low power consumption operation usin g low-frequency clock.(high-frequency clock oscillate.) idle0 mode: cpu stops, and only the time-based-tim er(tbt) on peripherals operate using high fre- quency clock. release by falling edge of th e source clock which is set by tbtcr. idle1 mode: cpu stops and peripherals operate us ing high frequency clock. release by interru- puts(cpu restarts). idle2 mode: cpu stops and peripherals operate usin g high and low frequency clock. release by inter- ruputs. (cpu restarts). sleep0 mode: cpu stops, and only the time-based-t imer(tbt) on peripherals operate using low fre- quency clock.release by falling edge of th e source clock which is set by tbtcr. sleep1 mode: cpu stops, and peripherals operate using low frequency clock. release by interru- put.(cpu restarts). sleep2 mode: cpu stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock. release by interruput. 14. wide operation voltage: 4.5 v to 5.5 v at 16 mhz /32.768 khz 2.7 v to 5.5 v at 8 mhz /32.768 khz
page 3 TMP86FH46ANG 1.2 pin assignment figure 1-1 pin assignment 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 (ain3) p33 (stop3/ain5) p35 (stop4/ain6) p36 (stop5/ain7) p37 varef avdd avss p40 p41 p42 (stop2/ain4) p34 p43 p45 p46 p47 xin xout test vdd p44 vss p20 ( int5 / stop ) p01 ( pdo4/pwm4/ppg4 /tc4) p02 (rxd/boot) p04 (so) p03 (txd) p07 (int4) p06 ( sck ) p05 (si) p00 ( int0 ) reset p22 (xtout) p21 (xtin) p15 (int3) p14 ( ppg ) p13 ( dvo ) p10 ( pdo3/pwm3 /tc3) p30 (ain0) p31 (ain1) p32 (ain2) p11 (int1) p12 (int2/tc1)
page 4 1.3 block diagram TMP86FH46ANG 1.3 block diagram figure 1-2 block diagram
page 5 TMP86FH46ANG 1.4 pin names and functions the TMP86FH46ANG has mcu mode, parallel prom mode, and serial prom mode. table 1-1 shows the pin functions in mcu mode. the serial prom mode is explained later in a separate chapter. table 1-1 pin names and functions(1/2) pin name pin number input/output functions p07 int4 33 io i port07 external interrupt 4 input p06 sck 32 io io port06 serial clock input/output p05 si 31 io i port05 serial data input p04 so 30 io o port04 serial data output p03 txd 29 io o port03 uart data output p02 rxd boot 28 io i i port02 uart data input serial prom mode control input p01 pdo4/pwm4/ppg4 tc4 27 io o i port01 pdo4/pwm4/ppg4 output tc4 input p00 int0 26 io i port00 external interrupt 0 input p15 int3 34 io i port15 external interrupt 3 input p14 ppg 35 io o port14 ppg output p13 dvo 36 io o port13 divider output p12 int2 tc1 37 io i i port12 external interrupt 2 input tc1 input p11 int1 38 io i port11 external interrupt 1 input p10 pdo3/pwm3 tc3 39 io o i port10 pdo3/pwm3 output tc3 input p22 xtout 23 io o port22 resonator connecting pins(32.768 khz) for inputting external clock p21 xtin 22 io i port21 resonator connecting pins(32.768 khz) for inputting external clock p20 int5 stop 25 io i i port20 external interrupt 5 input stop mode release signal input p37 ain7 stop5 5 io i i port37 analog input7 stop5 input
page 6 1.4 pin names and functions TMP86FH46ANG p36 ain6 stop4 4 io i i port36 analog input6 stop4 input p35 ain5 stop3 3 io i i port35 analog input5 stop3 input p34 ain4 stop2 2 io i i port34 analog input4 stop2 input p33 ain3 1 io i port33 analog input3 p32 ain2 42 io i port32 analog input2 p31 ain1 41 io i port31 analog input1 p30 ain0 40 io i port30 analog input0 p47 16 io port47 p46 15 io port46 p45 14 io port45 p44 13 io port44 p43 12 io port43 p42 11 io port42 p41 10 io port41 p40 9 io port40 xin 18 i resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock xout 19 o resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock reset 24 io reset signal test 20 i test pin for out-going test. normally, be fixed to low. varef 6 i analog base voltage input pin for a/d conversion avdd 7 i analog power supply avss 8 i analog power supply vdd 21 i +5v vss 17 i 0(gnd) table 1-1 pin names and functions(2/2) pin name pin number input/output functions
page 7 TMP86FH46ANG 2. operational description 2.1 cpu core functions the cpu core consists of a cpu, a system cl ock controller, and an interrupt controller. this section provides a description of the cpu core, the program memory, the data memory, and the reset circuit. 2.1.1 memory address map the TMP86FH46ANG memory is composed flash, ram, dbr(data buffer re gister) and sfr(special function register). they are all mapped in 64-kbyte address space. figure 2-1 shows the TMP86FH46ANG memory address map. figure 2-1 memory address map 2.1.2 program memory (flash) the TMP86FH46ANG has a 16384 bytes (address c000 h to ffffh) of program memory (flash ). 2.1.3 data memory (ram) the TMP86FH46ANG has 512bytes (address 0040h to 023fh) of internal ram. the first 192 bytes (0040h to 00ffh) of the internal ra m are located in the direct area; inst ructions with shorten operations are available against such an area. sfr 0000 h 64 bytes sfr: ram: special function register includes: i/o ports peripheral control registers peripheral status registers system control registers program status word random access memory includes: data memory stack 003f h ram 0040 h 512 bytes 023f h dbr 0f80 h 128 bytes dbr: data buffer register includes: peripheral control registers peripheral status registers 0fff h c000 h flash: program memory flash 16384 bytes ffc0 h vector table for vector call instructions (32 bytes) ffdf h ffe0 h vector table for interrupts (32 bytes) ffff h
page 8 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FH46ANG the data memory contents become un stable when the power supply is turned on; therefore, the data memory should be initialized by an initialization routine. 2.2 system clock controller the system clock controller consists of a clock generator, a timing generator, and a standby controller. figure 2-2 syst em colck control 2.2.1 clock generator the clock generator generates the basic clock which pr ovides the system clocks supplied to the cpu core and peripheral hardware. it contains two oscillation ci rcuits: one for the high-frequency clock and one for the low-frequency clock. power consumption can be reduced by switching of the standby controller to low-power operation based on the low-frequency clock. the high-frequency (fc) clock and low-frequency (fs) clock can easily be obtained by connecting a resonator between the xin/xout and xtin/xtout pins respectively. clock input from an exte rnal oscillator is also possible. in this case, external clock is applied to xin/xtin pin with xout/xtout pin not connected. example :clears ram to ?00h?. (TMP86FH46ANG) ld hl, 0040h ; start address setup ld a, h ; initial value (00h) setup ld bc, 01ffh sramclr: ld (hl), a inc hl dec bc jrs f, sramclr tbtcr syscr2 syscr1 xin xout xtin xtout fc 0036 h 0038 h 0039 h fs timing generator control register timing generator standby controller system clocks clock generator control high-frequency clock oscillator low-frequency clock oscillator clock generator system control registers
page 9 TMP86FH46ANG figure 2-3 examples of resonator connection note:the function to monitor the basic clock directly at external is not provided for hardware, however, with dis- abling all interrupts and watchdog timers, the oscillation frequency can be adjusted by monitoring the pulse which the fixed frequency is outputted to the port by the program. the system to require the adjustment of the oscilla tion frequency should create the program for the adjust- ment in advance. xout xin (open) xout xin xtout xtin (open) xtout xtin (a) crystal/ceramic resonator (b) external oscillator (c) crystal (d) external oscillator high-frequency clock low-frequency clock
page 10 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FH46ANG 2.2.2 timing generator the timing generator generates the various system cloc ks supplied to the cpu core and peripheral hardware from the basic clock (fc or fs). the timing generator provides the following functions. 1. generation of main system clock 2. generation of divider output ( dvo ) pulses 3. generation of source clocks for time base timer 4. generation of source clocks for watchdog timer 5. generation of internal source clocks for timer/counters 6. generation of warm-up clocks for releasing stop mode 2.2.2.1 configuration of timing generator the timing generator consists of a 2-stage prescaler, a 21-stage divider, a main system clock generator, and machine cycle counters. an input clock to the 7th stage of the divider depends on the operating mode, syscr2 and tbtcr, that is shown in figure 2-4. as reset and stop mode star ted/canceled, the prescaler and the divider are cleared to ?0?. figure 2-4 configurat ion of timing generator multi- plexer high-frequency clock fc low-frequency clock fs divider sysck fc/4 fc or fs machine cycle counters main system clock generator 1 2 1 4 3 2 8 7 10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 dv7ck multiplexer warm-up controller watchdog timer a s b y s b0 a0 y0 b1 a1 y1 5 6 17 18 19 20 21 timer counter, serial interface, time-base-timer, divider output, etc. (peripheral functions)
page 11 TMP86FH46ANG note 1: in single clock mode, do not set dv7ck to ?1?. note 2: do not set ?1? on dv7ck while the low-frequency clock is not operated stably. note 3: fc: high-frequency clock [hz], fs : low-frequency clock [hz], *: don?t care note 4: in slow1/2 and sleep1/2 modes, the dv7ck setting is ineffective, and fs is input to the 7th stage of the divider. note 5: when stop mode is entered from normal1/2 mode, the dv 7ck setting is ineffective during the warm-up period after release of stop mode, and the 6th stage of the divider is input to the 7th stage during this period. 2.2.2.2 machine cycle instruction execution and peripheral hardware operat ion are synchronized with the main system clock. the minimum instruction execution uni t is called an ?machine cycle?. th ere are a total of 10 different types of instructions for the tlcs-870/c series: ra nging from 1-cycle instructions which require one machine cycle for execution to 10-cyc le instructions which require 10 machine cycles fo r execution. a machine cycle consists of 4 states (s0 to s3), and each state consists of one main system clock. figure 2-5 machine cycle 2.2.3 operation mode control circuit the operation mode control circuit starts and stops th e oscillation circuits for the high-frequency and low- frequency clocks, and switches the main system clock. there are three operating modes: single clock mode, dual clock mode and stop mode. these modes are cont rolled by the system cont rol registers (syscr1 and syscr2). figure 2-6 shows the operating mode transition diagram. 2.2.3.1 single-clock mode only the oscillation circuit for the high-frequenc y clock is used, and p21 (xtin) and p22 (xtout) pins are used as input/output ports . the main-system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock. in the single-clock mode, the machine cycle time is 4/fc [s]. (1) normal1 mode in this mode, both the cpu core and on-chip pe ripherals operate using the high-frequency clock. the TMP86FH46ANG is placed in this mode after reset. timing generator control register tbtcr (0036h) 76543210 (dvoen) (dvock) dv7ck (tbten) (tbtck) (initial value: 0000 0000) dv7ck selection of input to the 7th stage of the divider 0: fc/2 8 [hz] 1: fs r/w main system clock state machine cycle s3 s2 s1 s0 s3 s2 s1 s0 1/fc or 1/fs [s]
page 12 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FH46ANG (2) idle1 mode in this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remains active. the cpu and the watchdog timer are halted; however on-chip peripherals remain active (operate using the high-frequency clock). idle1 mode is started by syscr2 = "1", and idle1 mode is released to normal1 mode by an interrupt request from the on-chip peri pherals or external interrupt inputs. when the imf (interrupt master enable flag) is ?1? (interrupt enable), the execution will resume with the acceptance of the interrupt, and the operation will return to nor mal after the interrupt service is completed. when the imf is ?0? (interrupt disable), the execution will resume with the instruction which follows the idle1 mode start instruction. (3) idle0 mode in this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator an d the timer-base-timer, stops operation. this mode is enabled by syscr2 = "1". when idle0 mode starts, the cpu stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the peripheral circuits other than tbt. then, upon de tecting the falling edge of the source clock selected with tbtcr, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to al l peripheral circuits. when returned from idle0 mode, the cpu rest arts operating, entering normal1 mode back again. idle0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how tbtcr is set. when imf = ?1?, ef6 (tbt interrupt individu al enable flag) = ?1?, and tb tcr = ?1?, interrupt pro- cessing is performed. when idle0 mode is entered while tbtcr = ?1?, the inttbt interrupt latch is set after returning to normal1 mode. 2.2.3.2 dual-clock mode both the high-frequency and low-frequency oscillatio n circuits are used in th is mode. p21 (xtin) and p22 (xtout) pins cannot be used as input/output ports. the main system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock in normal2 and idle2 modes, and is obtained from the low-frequency clock in slow and sleep modes. th e machine cycle time is 4/fc [s] in the normal2 and idle2 modes, and 4/fs [s] (122 s at fs = 32.768 khz) in the slow and sleep modes. the tlcs-870/c is placed in the signal-clock mode during reset. to use the dual-clock mode, the low- frequency oscillator should be turned on at the start of a program. (1) normal2 mode in this mode, the cpu core operates with the high-frequency clock. on-chip peripherals operate using the high-frequency clock and/or low-frequency clock. (2) slow2 mode in this mode, the cpu core operates with the lo w-frequency clock, while both the high-frequency clock and the low-frequency clock are operated. as the syscr2 becomes "1", the hard- ware changes into slow2 mode. as the syscr2 becomes ?0?, the hardware changes into normal2 mode. as the syscr2 beco mes ?0?, the hardware changes into slow1 mode. do not clear syscr2 to ?0? during slow2 mode. (3) slow1 mode this mode can be used to reduce power-consu mption by turning off oscillation of the high-fre- quency clock. the cpu core and on-chip peri pherals operate using th e low-frequency clock.
page 13 TMP86FH46ANG switching back and forth between slow1 and slow2 modes are performed by syscr2. in slow1 and sleep modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped. (4) idle2 mode in this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remain active. the cpu and the watchdog timer are halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain activ e (operate using the high-frequency clock and/or the low-frequency clock). starting and releasing of idle2 mode are the same as for idle1 mode, except that operation re turns to normal2 mode. (5) sleep1 mode in this mode, the internal oscillation circuit of the low-frequency clock remains active. the cpu, the watchdog timer, and the internal oscillation circuit of the high-frequency clock are halted; how- ever, on-chip peripherals remain active (operate us ing the low-frequency clock). starting and releas- ing of sleep mode are the same as for idle1 mo de, except that operation returns to slow1 mode. in slow1 and sleep1 modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped. (6) sleep2 mode the sleep2 mode is the idle mode corresponding to the slow2 mode. the status under the sleep2 mode is same as that under the sleep1 mo de, except for the oscilla tion circuit of the high- frequency clock. (7) sleep0 mode in this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation. this mode is enabled by setting ?1? on bit syscr2. when sleep0 mode starts, the cp u stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the peripheral circuits other than tbt. then, upon de tecting the falling edge of the source clock selected with tbtcr, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to al l peripheral circuits. when returned from sleep0 mode, the cpu restarts operating, entering slow1 mode back again. sleep0 mode is entered and returned re gardless of how tbtcr is set. when imf = ?1?, ef6 (tbt interrupt individual enable flag ) = ?1?, and tbtcr = ?1?, interrupt pro- cessing is performed. when sleep0 mode is entered while tbtcr = ?1?, the inttbt interrupt latch is set after returning to slow1 mode. 2.2.3.3 stop mode in this mode, the internal oscillation circuit is turned off, causing all system operations to be halted. the internal status immediately prior to the halt is held with a lowest power consumption during stop mode. stop mode is started by the syst em control register 1 (syscr1), an d stop mode is released by a inputting (either level-sensitive or edge-sens itive can be programmably selected) to the stop pin. after the warm-up period is completed, the execution resumes with the instruction which follows the stop mode start instruction.
page 14 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FH46ANG note 1: normal1 and normal2 modes are generically called no rmal; slow1 and slow2 are called slow; idle0, idle1 and idle2 are called idle; sleep0, sleep1 and sleep2 are called sleep. note 2: the mode is released by fa lling edge of tbtcr setting. figure 2-6 operating mode transition diagram table 2-1 operating mode and conditions operating mode oscillator cpu core tbt other peripherals machine cycle time high frequency low frequency single clock reset oscillation stop reset reset reset 4/fc [s] normal1 operate operate operate idle1 halt idle0 halt stop stop halt ? dual clock normal2 oscillation oscillation operate with high frequency operate operate 4/fc [s] idle2 halt slow2 operate with low frequency 4/fs [s] sleep2 halt slow1 stop operate with low frequency sleep1 halt sleep0 halt stop stop halt ? note 2 syscr2 = "1" stop pin input stop pin input stop pin input interrupt interrupt syscr2 = "0" syscr2 = "1" syscr2 = "0" syscr2 = "0" syscr1 = "1" syscr1 = "1" syscr1 = "1" syscr2 = "1" syscr2 = "1" interrupt syscr2 = "1" syscr2 = "1" interrupt syscr2 = "1" reset release normal1 mode idle0 mode (a) single-clock mode idle1 mode normal2 mode idle2 mode syscr2 = "1" slow2 mode sleep2 mode slow1 mode sleep1 mode sleep0 mode reset (b) dual-clock mode stop syscr2 = "1" note 2
page 15 TMP86FH46ANG note 1: always set retm to ?0? when transiting from normal mode to stop mode. always set retm to ?1? when transiting from slow mode to stop mode. note 2: when stop mode is released with reset pin input, a return is made to normal1 regardless of the retm contents. note 3: fc: high-frequency clock [hz], fs : low-frequency clock [hz], *; don?t care note 4: bits 1 in syscr1 are read as undefined data when a read instruction is executed. note 5: as the hardware becomes stop mode under outen = ?0?, input value is fixed to ?0?; therefore it may cause external interrupt request on account of falling edge. note 6: when the key-on wakeup is used, relm should be set to "1". note 7: port p20 is used as stop pin. therefore, when stop mode is started, outen does not affect to p20, and p20 becomes high-z mode. note 8: the warmig-up time should be set correctly for using oscillator. note 1: a reset is applied if both xen and xten are cleared to ?0?, xen is cleared to ?0? when sysck = ?0?, or xten is cleared to ?0? when sysck = ?1?. note 2: *: don?t care, tg: timing generator, *; don?t care note 3: bits 3, 1 and 0 in syscr2 are always read as undefined value. note 4: do not set idle and tghalt to ?1? simultaneously. note 5: because returning from idle0/sleep0 to normal1/slow 1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period of idle0/sleep0 mode might be shorter than the period setting by tbtcr. note 6: when idle1/2 or sleep1/2 mode is rel eased, idle is automatically cleared to ?0?. note 7: when idle0 or sleep0 mode is released, tghalt is automatically cleared to ?0?. system control register 1 syscr176543210 (0038h) stop relm retm outen wut (initial value: 0000 000*) stop stop mode start 0: cpu core and peripherals remain active 1: cpu core and peripherals are halted (start stop mode) r/w relm release method for stop mode 0: edge-sensitive release 1: level-sensitive release r/w retm operating mode after stop mode 0: return to normal1/2 mode 1: return to slow1 mode r/w outen port output during stop mode 0: high impedance 1: output kept r/w wut warm-up time at releasing stop mode return to normal mode return to slow mode r/w 000 010 100 110 *01 *11 3 x 2 16 /fc 2 16 /fc 3 x 2 14 /fc 2 14 /fc 3 x 2 10 /fc 2 10 /fc 3 x 2 13 /fs 2 13 /fs 3 x 2 6 /fs 2 6 /fs 3 x 2 6 /fs 2 6 /fs system control register 2 syscr2 (0039h) 76543210 xen xten sysck idle tghalt (initial value: 1000 *0**) xen high-frequency oscillator control 0: turn off oscillation 1: turn on oscillation r/w xten low-frequency oscillator control 0: turn off oscillation 1: turn on oscillation sysck main system clock select (write)/main system clock moni- tor (read) 0: high-frequency clock (normal1/normal2/idle1/idle2) 1: low-frequency clock (slow1/slow2/sleep1/sleep2) idle cpu and watchdog timer control (idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes) 0: cpu and watchdog timer remain active 1: cpu and watchdog timer are stopped (start idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes) r/w tghalt tg control (idle0 and sleep0 modes) 0: feeding clock to all peripherals from tg 1: stop feeding clock to peripherals except tbt from tg. (start idle0 and sleep0 modes)
page 16 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FH46ANG note 8: before setting tghalt to ?1?, be sure to stop peripheral s. if peripherals are not stopped, the interrupt latch of periph erals may be set after idle0 or sleep0 mode is released. 2.2.4 operating mode control 2.2.4.1 stop mode stop mode is controlled by the system control register 1, the stop pin input and key-on wakeup input (stop5 to stop2) which is controlled by the stop mode release control register (stopcr). the stop pin is also used both as a port p20 and an int5 (external interrupt input 5) pin. stop mode is started by setting syscr1 to ?1?. during stop mode, the following status is maintained. 1. oscillations are turned off, and all internal operations are halted. 2. the data memory, registers, the program status wo rd and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before stop mode was entered. 3. the prescaler and the divider of th e timing generator are cleared to ?0?. 4. the program counter holds the address 2 ahead of th e instruction (e.g., [set (syscr1).7]) which started stop mode. stop mode includes a level-sensitive mode and an edge-sensitive mode, either of which can be selected with the syscr1. do not use any key-on wakeup input (stop5 to stop2) for releas- ing stop mode in edge-sensitive mode. note 1: the stop mode can be released by either th e stop or key-on wakeup pin (stop5 to stop2). however, because the stop pin is different from the key-on wakeup and can not inhibit the release input, the stop pin must be used for releasing stop mode. note 2: during stop period (from start of stop mode to end of warm up), due to changes in the external interrupt pin signal, interrupt latches may be set to ?1? and interrupts may be accepted immediately after stop mode is released. before starting stop mode, therefore, disable interrupts. also, before enabling interrupts after stop mode is rel eased, clear unnecessary interrupt latches. (1) level-sensitive release mode (relm = ?1?) in this mode, stop mode is released by setting the stop pin high or setting the stop5 to stop2 pin input which is enabled by stopcr. this mo de is used for capacitor backup when the main power supply is cut off and long term battery backup. even if an instruction for starting stop mode is executed while stop pin input is high or stop5 to stop2 input is low, stop mode does not start but instead the warm-up sequence starts immedi- ately. thus, to start stop mode in the level-sensitive release mode, it is necessary for the program to first confirm that the stop pin input is low or stop5 to stop2 input is high. the following two methods can be used for confirmation. 1. testing a port. 2. using an external interrupt input int5 ( int5 is a falling edge-sensitive input). example 1 :starting stop mode from normal mode by testing a port p20. ld (syscr1), 01010000b ; sets up the level-sensitive release mode sstoph: test (p2prd). 0 ; wait until the stop pin input goes low level jrs f, sstoph di ; imf 0 set (syscr1). 7 ; starts stop mode
page 17 TMP86FH46ANG figure 2-7 level-s ensitive release mode note 1: even if the stop pin input is low after warm-up start, the stop mode is not restarted. note 2: in this case of changing to the level-s ensitive mode from the edge-s ensitive mode, the release mode is not switched until a rising edge of the stop pin input is detected. (2) edge-sensitive release mode (relm = ?0?) in this mode, stop mode is released by a rising edge of the stop pin input. this is used in appli- cations where a relatively short pr ogram is executed repeat edly at periodic intervals. this periodic signal (for example, a clock from a low-power consumption oscillator) is input to the stop pin. in the edge-sensitive release mode, stop mode is started even when the stop pin input is high level. do not use any stop5 to stop2 pin input for releasing stop mode in edge-sensitive release mode. figure 2-8 edge-sensitive release mode example 2 :starting stop mode from normal mode with an int5 interrupt. pint5: test (p2prd). 0 ; to reject noise, stop mode does not start if jrs f, sint5 port p20 is at high ld (syscr1), 01010000b ; sets up the level-sensitive release mode. di ; imf 0 set (syscr1). 7 ; starts stop mode sint5: reti example :starting stop mode from normal mode di ; imf 0 ld (syscr1), 10010000b ; starts after specified to the edge-sensitive release mode v ih normal operation warm up stop operation confirm by program that the stop pin input is low and start stop mode. always released if the stop pin input is high. stop pin xout pin stop mode is released by the hardware. normal operation normal operation normal operation v ih stop mode is released by the hardware at the rising edge of stop pin input. warm up stop mode started by the program. stop operation stop operation stop pin xout pin
page 18 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FH46ANG stop mode is released by the following sequence. 1. in the dual-clock mode, when returning to normal2, both the high-frequency and low- frequency clock oscillators are turned on; when returning to slow1 mode, only the low- frequency clock oscillator is turned on. in the single-clock mode, only the high-frequency clock oscillator is turned on. 2. a warm-up period is inserted to allow oscillation time to stabilize. during warm up, all internal operations remain halted. six differ ent warm-up times can be selected with the syscr1 in accordance with the resonator characteristics. 3. when the warm-up time has elapsed, normal operation resumes with the instruction follow- ing the stop mode start instruction. note 1: when the stop mode is released, the start is made after the prescaler and the divider of the timing generator are cleared to "0". note 2: stop mode can also be released by inputting low level on the reset pin, which immediately performs the normal reset operation. note 3: when stop mode is released with a low hold voltage, the following cautions must be observed. the power supply voltage must be at the operating voltage level before releasing stop mode. the reset pin input must also be ?h? level, rising together with the power supply voltage. in this case, if an external time const ant circuit has been connected, the reset pin input voltage will increase at a slower pace than the power supply vo ltage. at this time, there is a danger that a reset may occur if input voltage level of the reset pin drops below the non-inverting high-level input voltage (hysteresis input). note 1: the warm-up time is obtained by dividing the ba sic clock by the divider. therefore, the warm-up time may include a certain amount of error if ther e is any fluctuation of the oscillation frequency when stop mode is released. thus, the warm -up time must be considered as an approximate value. table 2-2 warm-up time example (at fc = 16.0 mhz, fs = 32.768 khz) wut warm-up time [ms] return to normal mode return to slow mode 000 010 100 110 *01 *11 12.288 4.096 3.072 1.024 0.192 0.064 750 250 5.85 1.95 5.9 2.0
page 19 TMP86FH46ANG figure 2-9 stop mode start/release instruction address a + 4 0 instruction address a + 3 turn on turn on warm up 0 n halt set (syscr1). 7 turn off (a) stop mode start (example: start with set (syscr1). 7 instruction located at address a) a + 6 a + 5 a + 4 a + 3 a + 2 n + 2 n + 3 n + 4 a + 3 n + 1 instruction address a + 2 2 1 0 3 (b) stop mode release count up turn off halt oscillator circuit program counter instruction execution divider main system clock oscillator circuit stop pin input program counter instruction execution divider main system clock
page 20 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FH46ANG 2.2.4.2 idle1/2 mode and sleep1/2 mode idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (syscr2) and maskable interrupts. the following status is maintained during these modes. 1. operation of the cpu and watchdog timer (wdt) is halted. on-chip peripherals continue to operate. 2. the data memory, cpu registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before these modes were entered. 3. the program counter holds the address 2 ahead of th e instruction which starts these modes. figure 2-10 idle1/ 2 and sleep1/2 modes reset reset input ?0? ?1? (interrupt release mode) yes no no cpu and wdt are halted interrupt request imf interrupt processing normal release mode yes starting idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes by instruction execution of the instruc- tion which follows the idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes start instruction
page 21 TMP86FH46ANG ? start the idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes after imf is set to "0", set the individual inte rrupt enable flag (ef) which releases idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes. to start idle1/2 and sl eep1/2 modes, set syscr2 to ?1?. ? release the idle1 /2 and sleep1/2 modes idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode. these modes are selected by interrupt master en able flag (imf). after releasing idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes, the syscr2 is automa tically cleared to ?0? and the operation mode is returned to the mode preced ing idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes. idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the reset pin. after releasing reset, the operation mode is started from normal1 mode. (1) normal release mode (imf = ?0?) idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled by the individual interrupt enable flag (ef). after the interrupt is ge nerated, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the idle1/2 and sleep1/2 mo des start instruction. normally, the interrupt latches (il) of the interrupt source used for releas ing must be cleared to ?0? by load instructions. (2) interrupt release mode (imf = ?1?) idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled with the individual interrupt enable flag (ef) and the interrupt processi ng is started. after the interrupt is processed, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the instruction, which starts idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes. note: when a watchdog timer interrupts is generated immediately before idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes are started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes will not be started.
page 22 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FH46ANG figure 2-11 idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes start/release halt halt halt halt operate instruction address a + 2 a + 3 a + 2 a + 4 a + 3 a + 3 halt set (syscr2). 4 operate operate operate acceptance of interrupt ?r:w normal release mode ?s:w interrupt release mode main system clock interrupt request program counter instruction execution watchdog timer main system clock interrupt request program counter instruction execution watchdog timer main system clock interrupt request program counter instruction execution watchdog timer (a) idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes start (example: star ting with the set instruction located at address a) (b) idle1/2 and sleep1/2 modes release
page 23 TMP86FH46ANG 2.2.4.3 idle0 and sleep0 modes (idle0, sleep0) idle0 and sleep0 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (syscr2) and the time base timer control register (tbtcr). the following stat us is maintained during idle0 and sleep0 modes. 1. timing generator stops feeding clock to peripherals except tbt. 2. the data memory, cpu registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before idle0 and sleep0 modes were entered. 3. the program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instru ction which starts idle0 and sleep0 modes. note: before starting idle0 or sleep0 mode, be sure to stop (disable) peripherals. figure 2-12 idle 0 and sleep0 modes yes (normal release mode) yes (interrupt release mode) no yes reset input cpu and wdt are halted reset tbt source clock falling edge tbtcr = "1" interrupt processing imf = "1" yes tbt interrupt enable no no no no stopping peripherals by instruction yes starting idle0, sleep0 modes by instruction execution of the instruction which follows the idle0, sleep0 modes start instruction
page 24 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FH46ANG ? start the idle0 and sleep0 modes stop (disable) peripherals such as a timer counter. to start idle0 and sleep0 modes, set syscr2 to ?1?. ? release the idle0 and sleep0 modes idle0 and sleep0 modes include a normal re lease mode and an interrupt release mode. these modes are selected by inte rrupt master flag (imf), the i ndividual interrupt enable flag of tbt and tbtcr. after releasing idle0 and sleep0 modes, the syscr2 is automatically cleared to ?0? and the operatio n mode is returned to the mode preceding idle0 and sleep0 modes. before starting the idle0 or sleep0 mode, when the tbtcr is set to ?1?, inttbt interrupt latch is set to ?1?. idle0 and sleep0 modes can also be re leased by inputting low level on the reset pin. after releasing reset, the operation mode is started from normal1 mode. note: idle0 and sleep0 modes start/release wi thout reference to tbtcr setting. (1) normal release mode (imf ? ef6 ? tbtcr = ?0?) idle0 and sleep0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the tbtcr. after the falling edge is detect ed, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the idle0 and sleep0 modes start instruction. before starting the idle0 or sleep0 mode, when the tbtcr is set to ?1?, inttbt interrupt latch is set to ?1?. (2) interrupt release mode (imf ? ef6 ? tbtcr = ?1?) idle0 and sleep0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the tbtcr and inttbt interrupt processing is started. note 1: because returning from idle0, sleep0 to normal1, slow1 is executed by the asynchro- nous internal clock, the period of idle0, sleep0 mode might be the shorter than the period set- ting by tbtcr. note 2: when a watchdog timer interrupt is generat ed immediately before idle0/sleep0 mode is started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but idle0/sleep0 mode will not be started.
page 25 TMP86FH46ANG figure 2-13 idle0 and slee p0 modes start/release halt halt operate instruction address a + 2 halt operate set (syscr2). 2 halt operate acceptance of interrupt halt ?r:w normal release mode ?s:w interrupt release mode main system clock interrupt request program counter instruction execution watchdog timer main system clock tbt clock tbt clock program counter instruction execution watchdog timer main system clock program counter instruction execution watchdog timer a + 3 a + 2 a + 4 a + 3 a + 3 (a) idle0 and sleep0 modes start (example: starting with the set instruction located at address a (b) idle and sleep0 modes release
page 26 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FH46ANG 2.2.4.4 slow mode slow mode is controlled by the sy stem control register 2 (syscr2). the following is the methods to switch the mode with the warm-up counter. (1) switching from normal2 mode to slow1 mode first, set syscr2 to switch the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for slow2 mode. next, clear syscr2 to turn off high-frequency oscillation. note: the high-frequency clock can be co ntinued oscillation in order to return to normal2 mode from slow mode quickly. always turn off oscillat ion of high-frequency clock when switching from slow mode to stop mode. example 1 :switching from normal2 mode to slow1 mode. set (syscr2). 5 ; syscr2 1 (switches the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for slow2) clr (syscr2). 7 ; syscr2 0 (turns off high-frequency oscillation) example 2 :switching to the slow1 mode after low-frequency clock has stabilized. set (syscr2). 6 ; syscr2 1 ld (tc3cr), 43h ; sets mode for tc4, 3 (16-bit mode, fs for source) ld (tc4cr), 05h ; sets warming-up counter mode ldw (ttreg3), 8000h ; sets warm-up time (depend on oscillator accompanied) di ; imf 0 set (eirh). 1 ; enables inttc4 ei ; imf 1 set (tc4cr). 3 ; starts tc4, 3 : pinttc4: clr (tc4cr). 3 ; stops tc4, 3 set (syscr2). 5 ; syscr2 1 (switches the main system cl ock to the low-frequency clock) clr (syscr2). 7 ; syscr2 0 (turns off high-frequency oscillation) reti : vinttc4: dw pinttc4 ; inttc4 vector table
page 27 TMP86FH46ANG (2) switching from slow1 mode to normal2 mode note: after sysck is cleared to ?0?, executing the in structions is continiued by the low-frequency clock for the period synchronized with low-frequency and high-frequency clocks. first, set syscr2 to turn on the high-fre quency oscillation. when time for stabilization (warm up) has been taken by the timer/counter (tc4,tc3), clear syscr2 to switch the main system clock to the high-frequency clock. slow mode can also be released by inputting low level on the reset pin. after releasing reset, the operation mode is started from normal1 mode. example :switching from the slow1 mode to the normal2 mode (fc = 16 mhz, warm-up time is 4.0 ms). set (syscr2). 7 ; syscr2 1 (starts high-frequency oscillation) ld (tc3cr), 63h ; sets mode for tc4, 3 (16-bit mode, fc for source) ld (tc4cr), 05h ; sets warming-up counter mode ld (ttreg4), 0f8h ; sets warm-up time di ; imf 0 set (eirh). 1 ; enables inttc4 ei ; imf 1 set (tc4cr). 3 ; starts tc4, 3 : pinttc4: clr (tc4cr). 3 ; stops tc4, 3 clr (syscr2). 5 ; syscr2 0 (switches the main system clock to the high-frequency clock) reti : vinttc4: dw pinttc4 ; inttc4 vector table high-frequency clock low-frequency clock main system clock sysck
page 28 2. operational description 2.2 system clock controller TMP86FH46ANG figure 2-14 switching between the normal2 and slow modes set (syscr2). 7 normal2 mode clr (syscr2). 7 set (syscr2). 5 normal2 mode turn off (a) switching to the slow mode slow1 mode slow2 mode clr (syscr2). 5 (b) switching to the normal2 mode high- frequency clock low- frequency clock main system clock instruction execution sysck xen high- frequency clock low- frequency clock main system clock instruction execution sysck xen slow1 mode warm up during slow2 mode
page 29 TMP86FH46ANG 2.3 reset circuit the TMP86FH46ANG has four types of reset generation proce dures: an external reset in put, an address trap reset, a watchdog timer reset and a system cloc k reset. of these reset, the address trap reset, the watchdog timer and the system clock reset are a malfunction re set. when the malfunction reset request is detected, reset occurs during the maximum 24/fc[s] (the reset pin outputs "l" level). the malfunction reset circuit such as watchdog timer reset, address trap reset and system clock reset is not initial- ized when power is turned on. therefore, reset may occur during maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5 s at 16.0 mhz) when power is turned on. reset pin outputs "l" level during maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5 s at 16.0mhz). table 2-3 shows on-chip hardware initialization by reset action. 2.3.1 external reset input the reset pin contains a schmitt trigger (hysteresis) with an internal pull-up resistor. when the reset pin is held at ?l? level for at least 3 machin e cycles (12/fc [s]) wi th the power supply volt- age within the operating voltage range and oscillation stab le, a reset is applied and the internal state is initial- ized. when the reset pin input goes high, the reset operation is rele ased and the program execution starts at the vector address stored at addresses fffeh to ffffh. figure 2-15 reset circuit table 2-3 initializing internal status by reset action on-chip hardware initial value on-chip hardware initial value program counter (pc) (fffeh) prescaler and divider of timing generator 0 stack pointer (sp) not initialized general-purpose registers (w, a, b, c, d, e, h, l, ix, iy) not initialized jump status flag (jf) not initialized watchdog timer enable zero flag (zf) not initialized output latches of i/o ports refer to i/o port circuitry carry flag (cf) not initialized half carry flag (hf) not initialized sign flag (sf) not initialized overflow flag (vf) not initialized interrupt master enable flag (imf) 0 interrupt individual enable flags (ef) 0 control registers refer to each of control register interrupt latches (il) 0 ram not initialized internal reset reset vdd malfunction reset output circuit watchdog timer reset address trap reset system clock reset
page 30 2. operational description 2.3 reset circuit TMP86FH46ANG 2.3.2 address trap reset if the cpu should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip ram (when wdtcr1 is set to ?1 ?), dbr or the sfr area, ad dress trap reset will be generated. the reset time is maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5 s at 16.0 mhz). then, the reset pin outputs "l" level during maximum 24/fc[s]. note:the operating mode under address tr apped is alternative of reset or interrupt. the address trap area is alter- native. note 1: address ?a? is in the sfr, dbr or on-chip ram (wdtcr1 = ?1?) space. note 2: during reset release, reset vector ?r? is read out, and an instruction at address ?r? is fetched and decoded. note 3: varies on account of exter nal condition: voltage or capacitance figure 2-16 addr ess trap reset 2.3.3 watchdog timer reset refer to section ?watchdog timer?. 2.3.4 system clock reset if the condition as follows is detected, the system clock reset occurs automatically to prevent dead lock of the cpu. (the oscillation is continued without stopping.) - in case of clearing syscr2 an d syscr2 simultaneously to ? 0 ? . - in case of clearing syscr2 to ? 0 ? , when the syscr2 is ? 0 ? . - in case of clearing syscr2 to ? 0 ? , when the syscr2 is ? 1 ? . the reset time is maximum 24/fc (1.5 s at 16.0 mhz). then, the reset pin outputs "l" level during maxi- mum 24/fc[s] (1.5 s at 16.0mhz). instruction at address r 16/fc [s] maximum 24/fc [s] instruction execution internal reset signal reset output jp a reset release address trap is occurred ("l" output) 4/fc to 12/fc [s] note 3
page 31 TMP86FH46ANG
page 32 2. operational description 2.3 reset circuit TMP86FH46ANG
page 33 TMP86FH46ANG 3. interrupt control circuit the TMP86FH46ANG has a total of 18 interrupt sources excluding reset, of which 2 source levels are multi- plexed. interrupts can be nested with priorities. four of th e internal interrupt sources ar e non-maskable while the rest are maskable. interrupt sources are provided with interrupt latches (il) , which hold interrupt requests, and independent vectors. the interrupt latch is set to ?1? by th e generation of its interrupt request wh ich requests the cpu to accept its inter- rupts. interrupts are enabled or disabled by software using the interrupt master enable fl ag (imf) and in terrupt enable flag (ef). if more than one interrupts are generated simultaneously, interrup ts are accepted in order which is domi- nated by hardware. however, there are no prioritized interrupt factors among non-maskable interrupts. note 1: the intsel register is used to select the interrupt source to be enabled for each multiplexed source level (see 3.3 inte r- rupt source selector (intsel)). note 2: to use the address trap interrupt (intatrap), clear wdtcr1 to ?0? (it is set for the ?reset request? after reset is cancelled). for details , see ?address trap?. note 3: to use the watchdog timer interrupt (intwdt), clear wdtcr1 to "0" (it is set for the "reset request" after reset is released). for details, see "watchdog timer". 3.1 interrupt latches (il15 to il2) an interrupt latch is provided for eac h interrupt source, except for a software interrupt and an executed the unde- fined instruction interrupt. when interrupt request is genera ted, the latch is set to ?1?, and the cpu is requested to accept the interrupt if its interrupt is enabled. the interrupt latch is cleared to "0" immediately after accepting inter- rupt. all interrupt latches are initialized to ?0? during reset. the interrupt latches are located on address 003ch and 003d h in sfr area. each latch can be cleared to "0" indi- vidually by instruction. however, il2 and il3 should not be cleared to "0" by software. for clearing the interrupt latch, load instruction should be used and then il2 and il3 should be set to "1". if the read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions are used, interrupt request would be cleared inadequately if inter- rupt is requested while such instructions are executed. interrupt latches are not set to ?1? by an instruction. interrupt factors enable condition interrupt latch vector address priority internal/external (reset) non-maskable ? fffe 1 internal intswi (software interrupt) non-maskable ? fffc 2 internal intundef (executed the undefined instruction interrupt) non-maskable ? fffc 2 internal intatrap (address trap interrupt) non-maskable il2 fffa 2 internal intwdt (watchdog timer interrupt) non-maskable il3 fff8 2 external int0 imf? ef4 = 1, int0en = 1 il4 fff6 5 external int1 imf? ef5 = 1 il5 fff4 6 internal inttbt imf? ef6 = 1 il6 fff2 7 internal inttc1 imf? ef7 = 1 il7 fff0 8 external int2 imf? ef8 = 1 il8 ffee 9 internal inttc4 imf? ef9 = 1 il9 ffec 10 internal inttc3 imf? ef10 = 1 il10 ffea 11 external int3 imf? ef11 = 1 il11 ffe8 12 internal intsio imf? ef12 = 1 il12 ffe6 13 internal intrxd imf? ef13 = 1 il13 ffe4 14 external int4 imf? ef14 = 1, il14er = 0 il14 ffe2 15 internal inttxd imf? ef14 = 1, il14er = 1 external int5 imf? ef15 = 1, il15er = 0 il15 ffe0 16 internal intadc imf? ef15 = 1, il15er = 1
page 34 3. interrupt control circuit 3.2 interrupt enable register (eir) TMP86FH46ANG since interrupt latches can be read, the status fo r interrupt requests can be monitored by software. note: in main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (ef) or the interrupt latch (il), be sure to clear imf to "0" (disable interrupt by di instruction). then set imf new ly again as required after operating on the ef or il (enable interrupt by ei instruction) in interrupt service routine, because the imf becomes "0 " automatically, clearing imf need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. however, if using multiple inte rrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating ef or il should be executed before setting imf="1". 3.2 interrupt enab le register (eir) the interrupt enable register (eir) enables and disables the acceptance of interrupts, except fo r the non-maskable interrupts (software interrupt, undefined instruction interr upt, address trap interrupt and watchdog interrupt). non- maskable interrupt is accepted regardless of the contents of the eir. the eir consists of an interrupt mast er enable flag (imf) and the individua l interrupt enable flags (ef). these registers are located on address 003ah and 003bh in sfr ar ea, and they can be read and written by an instructions (including read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions). 3.2.1 interrupt ma ster enable flag (imf) the interrupt enable register (imf ) enables and disables the acceptance of the whole maskable interrupt. while imf = ?0?, all maskable interrupts are not accepted regardless of the status on each individual interrupt enable flag (ef). by setting imf to ?1?, the interrupt becomes acceptable if the individuals are enabled. when an interrupt is accepted, imf is cleared to ?0? after the latest status on imf is stacked. thus the maskable inter- rupts which follow are disabled. by executing return interrupt instruction [reti/retn], the stacked data, which was the status before interrup t acceptance, is loaded on imf again. the imf is located on bit0 in eirl (address: 003ah in sfr), and can be read and written by an instruction. the imf is normally set and cl eared by [ei] and [di] instruction respectively. during reset, the imf is initial- ized to ?0?. 3.2.2 individual interrupt enable flags (ef15 to ef4) each of these flags enables and disables the acceptan ce of its maskable interrupt . setting the corresponding bit of an individual interrupt enable flag to ?1? enables acceptan ce of its interrupt, and setting the bit to ?0? dis- ables acceptance. during reset, all the i ndividual interrupt enable flags (ef15 to ef4) ar e initialized to ?0? and all maskable interrupts are not accepted until they are set to ?1?. note:in main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (ef) or the interrupt latch (il), be sure to clear imf to "0" (disable interrupt by di instruction). then set imf newly again as required after operating on the ef or il (enable interrupt by ei instruction) in interrupt service routine, because the imf become s "0" automatically, clearing imf need not execute nor- mally on interrupt service routine. however, if using mult iple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulat- ing ef or il should be executed before setting imf="1". example 1 :clears interrupt latches di ; imf 0 ldw (ill), 111010000011 1111b ; il12, il10 to il6 0 ei ; imf 1 example 2 :reads interrupt latchess ld wa, (ill) ; w ilh, a ill example 3 :tests interrupt latches test (ill). 7 ; if il7 = 1 then jump jr f, sset
page 35 TMP86FH46ANG example 1 :enables interrupts individually and sets imf di ; imf 0 ldw : (eirl), 1110100010100000b ; ef15 to ef13, ef11, ef7, ef5 1 note: imf should not be set. : ei ; imf 1 example 2 :c compiler description example unsigned int _io (3ah) eirl; /* 3ah shows eirl address */ _di(); eirl = 10100000b; : _ei();
page 36 3. interrupt control circuit 3.2 interrupt enable register (eir) TMP86FH46ANG note 1: to clear any one of bits il7 to il4, be sure to write "1" into il2 and il3. note 2: in main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable fl ag (ef) or the interrupt latch (il), be sure to clear imf to "0" (disable interrupt by di instruction). then set imf newly again as required after operating on the ef or il (enable interrupt by ei instruction) in interrupt service routine, because the imf becomes "0" automatically, clear ing imf need not execute normally on inter- rupt service routine. however, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, mani pulating ef or il should be exe- cuted before setting imf="1". note 3: do not clear il with read-modify-w rite instructions such as bit operations. note 1: *: don?t care note 2: do not set imf and the interrupt enable flag (ef15 to ef4) to ?1? at the same time. note 3: in main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable fl ag (ef) or the interrupt latch (il), be sure to clear imf to "0" (disable interrupt by di instruction). then set imf newly again as required after operating on the ef or il (enable interrupt by ei instruction) in interrupt service routine, because the imf becomes "0" automatically, clear ing imf need not execute normally on inter- rupt service routine. however, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, mani pulating ef or il should be exe- cuted before setting imf="1". interrupt latches (initial value: 00000000 000000**) ilh,ill (003dh, 003ch) 1514131211109876543210 il15 il14 il13 il12 il11 il10 il9 il8 il7 il6 il5 il4 il3 il2 ilh (003dh) ill (003ch) il15 to il2 interrupt latches at rd 0: no interrupt request 1: interrupt request at wr 0: clears the interrupt request 1: (interrupt latch is not set.) r/w interrupt enable registers (initial value: 00000000 0000***0) eirh,eirl (003bh, 003ah) 1514131211109876543210 ef15 ef14 ef13 ef12 ef11 ef10 ef9 ef8 ef7 ef6 ef5 ef4 imf eirh (003bh) eirl (003ah) ef15 to ef4 individual-interrupt enable flag (specified for each bit) 0: 1: disables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. enables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. r/w imf interrupt master enable flag 0: 1: disables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts enables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts
page 37 TMP86FH46ANG 3.3 interrupt sour ce selector (intsel) each interrupt source that shares the interrupt source level with another interrupt source is allowed to enable the interrupt latch only when it is selected in the intsel register. the interrupt controller does not hold interrupt requests corresponding to interrupt sour ces that are not selected in the intsel register. th erefore, the intsel reg- ister must be set appropriately befo re interrupt requests are generated. the following interrupt sources share their interrupt sour ce level; the source is selected onnthe register intsel. 1. int4 and inttxd share th e interrupt source level whose priority is 15. 2. int5 and intadc share the interrupt source level whose priority is 16. 3.4 interrupt sequence an interrupt request, which raised inte rrupt latch, is held, until interrupt is accepted or interrupt latch is cleared to ?0? by resetting or an instruct ion. interrupt acceptance sequence requires 8 machine cycles (2 s @16 mhz) after the completion of the current instruction. the interrupt service task terminates upon execution of an interrupt return instruction [reti] (for maskable interrupts) or [retn] (for non-maskable interrupts). figure 3-1 shows the timing chart of interrupt acceptance processing. 3.4.1 interrupt acceptance proc essing is packaged as follows. a. the interrupt master enab le flag (imf) is cleared to ?0? in or der to disable the acceptance of any fol- lowing interrupt. b. the interrupt latch (il) for the interrupt source accepted is cleared to ?0?. c. the contents of the program coun ter (pc) and the program status word, including the interrupt master enable flag (imf), are saved (pushed) on the st ack in sequence of psw + imf, pch, pcl. mean- while, the stack pointer (s p) is decremented by 3. d. the entry address (interrupt vect or) of the corresponding interrupt service program, loaded on the vec- tor table, is transferred to the program counter. e. the instruction stored at the entry address of the inte rrupt service program is executed. note:when the contents of psw are saved on the stack, the contents of imf are also saved. interrupt sour ce selector intsel (003eh) 76543210 ------il14eril15er(initial value: **** **00) il14er selects int4 or inttxd 0: int4 1: inttxd r/w il15er selects int5 or intadc 0: int5 1: intadc r/w
page 38 3. interrupt control circuit 3.4 interrupt sequence TMP86FH46ANG note 1: a: return address entry address, b: entry address, c: address which reti instruction is stored note 2: on condition that interrupt is enabled, it takes 38/fc [s ] or 38/fs [s] at maximum (if the interrupt latch is set at the first machine cycle on 10 cycle instruction) to start interrupt acceptance processing since its interrupt latch is set. figure 3-1 timing chart of interrupt acceptance/return in terrupt instruction example: correspondence be tween vector table address for inttbt an d the entry address of the interrupt service program figure 3-2 vector table address,entry address a maskable interrupt is not accepted until the imf is set to ?1? even if th e maskable interrupt higher than the level of current servicing interrupt is requested. in order to utilize nested interrupt service, the imf is set to ?1? in the interrupt service program. in this case, acceptable interrupt sources are selectively en abled by the individual interrupt enable flags. to avoid overloaded nesting, clear the individual interrupt enable flag whose interrupt is currently serviced, before setting imf to ?1?. as for non-maskable interr upt, keep interrupt service shorten compared with length between interrupt requests; otherwise the status cannot be recovered as non-maskable interrupt would simply nested. 3.4.2 saving/restoring general-purpose registers during interrupt acceptance processing , the program counter (pc) and the program status word (psw, includes imf) are automati cally saved on the stack, but the accumulato r and others are not. these registers are saved by software if necessary. when multiple interrupt se rvices are nested, it is also necessary to avoid using the same data memory area for saving registers. the fo llowing methods are used to save/restore the general- purpose registers. a b a c + 1 execute instruction sp pc execute instruction n n ? 2 n - 3 n ? 2n ? 1 n ? 1 n a + 2 a + 1 c + 2 b + 3 b + 2 b + 1 a + 1 a a ? 1 execute reti instruction interrupt acceptance execute instruction interrupt service task 1-machine cycle interrupt request interrupt latch (il) imf d2h 03h d203h d204h 06h vector table address entry address 0fh vector interrupt service program fff2h fff3h
page 39 TMP86FH46ANG 3.4.2.1 using push and pop instructions if only a specific register is saved or interrupts of the same source are nested , general-purpose registers can be saved/restored using the push/pop instructions. figure 3-3 save/store register using push and pop instructions 3.4.2.2 using data transfer instructions to save only a specific register wi thout nested interrupts, data tran sfer instructions are available. example :save/store register us ing push and pop instructions pintxx: push wa ; save wa register (interrupt processing) pop wa ; restore wa register reti ; return example :save/store register us ing data transfer instructions pintxx: ld (gsava), a ; save a register (interrupt processing) ld a, (gsava) ; restore a register reti ; return pcl pch psw at acceptance of an interrupt at execution of push instruction at execution of reti instruction at execution of pop instruction b-4 b-3 b-2 b-1 b pcl pch psw pcl pch psw sp address (example) sp sp sp a w b-5
page 40 3. interrupt control circuit 3.4 interrupt sequence TMP86FH46ANG figure 3-4 saving/restoring general-purpose r egisters under interrupt processing 3.4.3 interrupt return interrupt return instructions [reti]/[retn] perform as follows. as for address trap interrupt (intatrap), it is requir ed to alter stacked data for program counter (pc) to restarting address, during interrupt service program. note:if [retn] is executed with the above data unaltered, the program returns to the address trap area and intatrap occurs again.when interrupt acceptance pr ocessing has completed, stacked data for pcl and pch are located on address (sp + 1) and (sp + 2) respectively. interrupt requests are sampled during the final cycle of the instruction being executed. thus, the next inter- rupt can be accepted immediat ely after the interrupt retu rn instruction is executed. [reti]/[retn] interrupt return 1. program counter (pc) and program status word (psw, includes imf) are restored from the stack. 2. stack pointer (sp) is incremented by 3. example 1 :returning from address trap interrupt (intatrap) service program pintxx: pop wa ; recover sp by 2 ld wa, return address ; push wa ; alter stacked data (interrupt processing) retn ; return example 2 :restarting without returning interrupt (in this case, psw (includes imf) befo re interrupt acceptance is discarded.) pintxx: inc sp ; recover sp by 3 inc sp ; inc sp ; (interrupt processing) ld eirl, data ; set imf to ?1? or clear it to ?0? jp restart address ; jump into restarting address interrupt acceptance interrupt service task restoring registers saving registers interrupt return saving/restoring general-purpose registers using push/pop data transfer instruction main task
page 41 TMP86FH46ANG note 1: it is recommended that stack pointer be return to rate before intatrap (increment 3 times), if return inter- rupt instruction [retn] is not utilized during inte rrupt service program under intatrap (such as example 2). note 2: when the interrupt processing time is longer than the interrupt request generation time, the interrupt service task is performed but not the main task. 3.5 software interrupt (intsw) executing the swi instruction generates a software interr upt and immediately starts interrupt processing (intsw is highest prioritized interrupt). use the swi instruction only for detection of the address error or for debugging. 3.5.1 address error detection ffh is read if for some cause such as noise the cpu attempts to fetch an instruction from a non-existent memory address during single chip mode. code ffh is th e swi instruction, so a software interrupt is gener- ated and an address error is detect ed. the address error detection range can be further expanded by writing ffh to unused areas of the program memory. address trap reset is generated in case that an instruction is fetched from ram, dbr or sfr areas. 3.5.2 debugging debugging efficiency can be increased by placing the swi instruction at the software break point setting address. 3.6 undefined instruct ion interrupt (intundef) taking code which is not defined as authorized instru ction for instruction causes intundef. intundef is gen- erated when the cpu fetches such a co de and tries to execute it. intundef is accepted even if non-maskable inter- rupt is in process. contemporary process is broken and intundef interrupt process starts, soon after it is requested. note: the undefined instruction interrupt (intundef) forces cpu to jump into vector address, as software interrupt (swi) does. 3.7 address trap interrupt (intatrap) fetching instruction from unauthorized area for instructio ns (address trapped area) cause s reset output or address trap interrupt (intatrap). intatrap is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. contemporary pro- cess is broken and intatrap interrupt pro cess starts, soon afte r it is requested. note: the operating mode under address trapped, whether to be reset output or interrupt processing, is selected on watchdog timer control register (wdtcr). 3.8 external interrupts the TMP86FH46ANG has 6 external interrupt inputs. these inputs are equipped with digital noise reject circuits (pulse inputs of less than a certa in time are elimin ated as noise). edge selection is also possible with int1 to int4. the int0 /p00 pin can be configured as either an external inter- rupt input pin or an input/output port, and is configured as an input port during reset. edge selection, noise reject control and int0 /p00 pin function selection are performed by the external interrupt control register (eintcr).
page 42 3. interrupt control circuit 3.8 external interrupts TMP86FH46ANG note 1: in normal1/2 or idle1/2 mode, if a signal with no noise is input on an external interrupt pin, it takes a maximum of "si g- nal establishment time + 6/fs[s]" from the input signal's edge to set the interrupt latch. note 2: when int0en = "0", il4 is not set even if a falling edge is detected on the int0 pin input. note 3: when a pin with more than one function is used as an out put and a change occurs in data or input/output status, an inter - rupt request signal is generated in a pseudo manner. in this ca se, it is necessary to perform appropriate processing such as disabling the interrupt enable flag. source pin enable conditions release edge (level) digital noise reject int0 int0 imf ? ef4 ? int0en=1 falling edge pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 7/fc [s ] or more are considered to be signals. in the slow or the sleep mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are consid- ered to be signals. int1 int1 imf ? ef5 = 1 falling edge or rising edge pulses of less than 15/fc or 63/fc [s] are elimi- nated as noise. pulses of 49/fc or 193/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. in the slow or the sleep mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. int2 int2 imf ? ef8 = 1 falling edge or rising edge pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. in the slow or the sleep mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are consid- ered to be signals. int3 int3 imf ? ef11 = 1 falling edge or rising edge pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. in the slow or the sleep mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are consid- ered to be signals. int4 int4 imf ? ef14 = 1 and il14er=0 falling edge, rising edge, falling and rising edge or h level pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. in the slow or the sleep mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are consid- ered to be signals. int5 int5 imf ? ef15 = 1 and il15er=0 falling edge pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 7/fc [s ] or more are considered to be signals. in the slow or the sleep mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are consid- ered to be signals.
page 43 TMP86FH46ANG note 1: fc: high-frequency clock [hz], *: don?t care note 2: when the system clock frequency is switched between high and low or when the external interrupt control register (eintcr) is overwritten, the noise canceller may not operat e normally. it is recommended that external interrupts are dis- abled using the interrupt enable register (eir). note 3: the maximum time from modifying int1 nc until a noise reject time is changed is 2 6 /fc. note 4: in case reset pin is released while the state of int4 pin keeps "h" level, the external interrupt 4 request is not generated even if the int4 edge select is specified as "h" level. the rising edge is needed after reset pin is released. external interrupt control register eintcr76543210 (0037h) int1nc int0en int4es int3es int2es int1es (initial value: 0000 000*) int1nc noise reject time select 0: pulses of less than 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise 1: pulses of less than 15/fc [s] are eliminated as noise r/w int0en p00/ int0 pin configuration 0: p00 input/output port 1: int0 pin (port p00 should be set to an input mode) r/w int4 es int4 edge select 00: rising edge 01: falling edge 10: rising edge and falling edge 11: h level r/w int3 es int3 edge select 0: rising edge 1: falling edge r/w int2 es int2 edge select 0: rising edge 1: falling edge r/w int1 es int1 edge select 0: rising edge 1: falling edge r/w
page 44 3. interrupt control circuit 3.8 external interrupts TMP86FH46ANG
page 45 TMP86FH46ANG 4. special function register (sfr) the TMP86FH46ANG adopts the memory mapped i/o system , and all peripheral control and data transfers are performed through the special function register (sfr) or the data buffer register (dbr). the sfr is mapped on address 0000h to 003fh, dbr is mapped on address 0f80h to 0fffh. this chapter shows the arrangement of the special functi on register (sfr) and data buffer register (dbr) for TMP86FH46ANG. 4.1 sfr address read write 0000h p0dr 0001h p1dr 0002h p2dr 0003h p3dr 0004h p4dr 0005h reserved 0006h reserved 0007h reserved 0008h p0prd - 0009h reserved 000ah p2prd - 000bh reserved 000ch reserved 000dh p1cr 000eh p3cr 000fh p4cr 0010h tc1dral 0011h tc1drah 0012h tc1drbl 0013h tc1drbh 0014h tc1cr 0015h reserved 0016h tc3cr 0017h tc4cr 0018h ttreg3 0019h ttreg4 001ah pwreg3 001bh pwreg4 001ch adccr1 001dh adccr2 001eh adcdr2 - 001fh adcdr1 - 0020h uartsr uartcr1 0021h - uartcr2 0022h rdbuf tdbuf 0023h reserved 0024h reserved 0025h reserved
page 46 4. special function register (sfr) 4.1 sfr TMP86FH46ANG note 1: do not access reserved areas by the program. note 2: ? ; cannot be accessed. note 3: write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (bit manipulation instructions such as set, clr, etc. and logical operation instructions such as and, or, etc.). 0026h siocr1 0027h siosr 0028h siordb siotdb 0029h reserved 002ah reserved 002bh reserved 002ch reserved 002dh reserved 002eh reserved 002fh reserved 0030h reserved 0031h - stopcr 0032h reserved 0033h reserved 0034h - wdtcr1 0035h - wdtcr2 0036h tbtcr 0037h eintcr 0038h syscr1 0039h syscr2 003ah eirl 003bh eirh 003ch ill 003dh ilh 003eh intsel 003fh psw address read write
page 47 TMP86FH46ANG 4.2 dbr note 1: do not access reserved areas by the program. address read write 0f80h reserved : : : : 0f9fh reserved address read write 0fa0h reserved : : : : 0fbfh reserved address read write 0fc0h reserved : : : : 0fdfh reserved address read write 0fe0h reserved 0fe1h reserved 0fe2h reserved 0fe3h reserved 0fe4h reserved 0fe5h reserved 0fe6h reserved 0fe7h reserved 0fe8h reserved 0fe9h - flsstb 0feah spcr 0febh reserved 0fech reserved 0fedh reserved 0feeh reserved 0fefh reserved 0ff0h reserved 0ff1h reserved 0ff2h reserved 0ff3h reserved 0ff4h reserved 0ff5h reserved 0ff6h reserved 0ff7h reserved 0ff8h reserved 0ff9h reserved 0ffah reserved 0ffbh reserved 0ffch reserved 0ffdh reserved 0ffeh reserved 0fffh flscr
page 48 4. special function register (sfr) 4.2 dbr TMP86FH46ANG note 2: ? ; cannot be accessed. note 3: write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (bit manipulation instructions such as set, clr, etc. and logical operation instructions such as and, or, etc.).
page 49 TMP86FH46ANG 5. time base timer (tbt) the time base timer generates time base for key scanning, dynamic displaying, etc. it also provides a time base timer interrupt (inttbt). 5.1 time base timer 5.1.1 configuration figure 5-1 time base timer configuration 5.1.2 control time base timer is controled by time base timer control register (tbtcr). note 1: fc; high-frequency clock [hz], fs ; low-frequency clock [hz], *; don't care time base timer control register 7 6543210 tbtcr (0036h) (dvoen) (dvock) (dv7ck) tbten tbtck (initial value: 0000 0000) tbten time base timer enable / disable 0: disable 1: enable tbtck time base timer interrupt frequency select : [hz] normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2 sleep1/2 mode r/w dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 000 fc/2 23 fs/2 15 fs/2 15 001 fc/2 21 fs/2 13 fs/2 13 010 fc/2 16 fs/2 8 ? 011 fc/2 14 fs/2 6 ? 100 fc/2 13 fs/2 5 ? 101 fc/2 12 fs/2 4 ? 110 fc/2 11 fs/2 3 ? 111 fc/2 9 fs/2 ? fc/2 23 or fs/2 15 fc/2 21 or fs/2 13 fc/2 16 or fs/2 8 fc/2 14 or fs/2 6 fc/2 13 or fs/2 5 fc/2 12 or fs/2 4 fc/2 11 or fs/2 3 fc/2 9 or fs/2 tbtcr tbten tbtck 3 mpx source clock falling edge detector time base timer control register inttbt interrupt request idle0, sleep0 release request
page 50 5. time base timer (tbt) 5.1 time base timer TMP86FH46ANG note 2: the interrupt frequency (tbtck) must be selected with t he time base timer disabled (tbten="0"). (the interrupt fre- quency must not be changed with the disable from the enable state.) both frequency selection and enabling can be per- formed simultaneously. 5.1.3 function an inttbt ( time base timer interrupt ) is generated on the first falling edge of source clock ( the divider output of the timing generato which is selected by tbtck. ) after time base timer has been enabled. the divider is not cleared by the progra m; therefore, only the first interrupt may be generated ahead of the set interrupt period ( figure 5-2 ). figure 5-2 time base timer interrupt example :set the time base timer frequency to fc/2 16 [hz] and enable an inttbt interrupt. ld (tbtcr) , 00000010b ; tbtck 010 ld (tbtcr) , 00001010b ; tbten 1 di ; imf 0 set (eirl) . 6 table 5-1 time base timer interrupt frequency ( example : fc = 16.0 mhz, fs = 32.768 khz ) tbtck time base timer interrupt frequency [hz] normal1/2, idle1/2 mode normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 000 1.91 1 1 001 7.63 4 4 010 244.14 128 ? 011 976.56 512 ? 100 1953.13 1024 ? 101 3906.25 2048 ? 110 7812.5 4096 ? 111 31250 16384 ? source clock enable tbt interrupt period tbtcr inttbt
page 51 TMP86FH46ANG 5.2 divider output ( dvo ) approximately 50% duty pulse can be output using the divider output circuit, which is useful for piezoelectric buzzer drive. divider output is from dvo pin. 5.2.1 configuration figure 5-3 divider output 5.2.2 control the divider output is controlled by the time base timer control register. note: selection of divider output frequency (dvock) must be made whil e divider output is disabled (dvoen="0"). also, in other words, when changing the state of the divider output frequen cy from enabled (dvoen="1") to disable(dvoen="0"), do not change the setting of the divider output frequency. time base timer control register 7654 321 0 tbtcr (0036h) dvoen dvock (dv7ck) (tbten) (tbtck) (initial value: 0000 0000) dvoen divider output enable / disable 0: disable 1: enable r/w dvock divider output ( dvo ) frequency selection: [hz] normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2 sleep1/2 mode r/w dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 00 fc/2 13 fs/2 5 fs/2 5 01 fc/2 12 fs/2 4 fs/2 4 10 fc/2 11 fs/2 3 fs/2 3 11 fc/2 10 fs/2 2 fs/2 2 tbtcr output latch port output latch mpx dvoen tbtcr dvo pin output dvock divider output control register (a) configuration (b) timing chart data output 2 a b c y d s d q dvo pin fc/2 13 or fs/2 5 fc/2 12 or fs/2 4 fc/2 11 or fs/2 3 fc/2 10 or fs/2 2
page 52 5. time base timer (tbt) 5.2 divider output (dvo) TMP86FH46ANG example :1.95 khz pulse output (fc = 16.0 mhz) ld (tbtcr) , 00000000b ; dvock "00" ld (tbtcr) , 10000000b ; dvoen "1" table 5-2 divider output frequency ( exam ple : fc = 16.0 mhz, fs = 32.768 khz ) dvock divider output frequency [hz] normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 00 1.953 k 1.024 k 1.024 k 01 3.906 k 2.048 k 2.048 k 10 7.813 k 4.096 k 4.096 k 11 15.625 k 8.192 k 8.192 k
page 53 TMP86FH46ANG 6. watchdog timer (wdt) the watchdog timer is a fail-safe system to detect rapidl y the cpu malfunctions such as endless loops due to spu- rious noises or the deadlock conditions, and return the cpu to a sy stem recovery routine. the watchdog timer signal for detecting malfunctions can be programmed only once as ?reset request? or ?inter- rupt request?. upon the reset release, this signal is initialized to ?reset request?. when the watchdog timer is not used to detect malfunctions, it can be used as the timer to provide a periodic inter- rupt. note: care must be taken in system des ign since the watchdog timer functions are not be operated completely due to effect of disturbing noise. 6.1 watchdog timer configuration figure 6-1 watchdog timer configuration 0034 h overflow wdt output internal reset binary counters wdtout writing clear code writing disable code wdten wdtt 2 0035 h watchdog timer control registers wdtcr1 wdtcr2 intwdt interrupt request interrupt request reset request reset release clock clear 1 2 controller q sr s r q selector fc/2 23 or fs/2 15 fc/2 21 or fs/2 13 fc/2 19 or fs/2 11 fc/2 17 or fs/2 9
page 54 6. watchdog timer (wdt) 6.2 watchdog timer control TMP86FH46ANG 6.2 watchdog timer control the watchdog timer is controlled by the watchdog timer control registers (wdtcr1 and wdtcr2). the watch- dog timer is automatically enabled after the reset release. 6.2.1 malfunction detection me thods using the watchdog timer the cpu malfunction is detected, as shown below. 1. set the detection time, select the output, and clear the binary counter. 2. clear the binary counter repeatedly within the specified detection time. if the cpu malfunctions such as en dless loops or the deadlock condition s occur for some reason, the watch- dog timer output is activated by the binary-counter overflow unless the binary counters are cleared. when wdtcr1 is set to ?1? at this time, the reset request is generated and the reset pin outputs a low-level signal, then internal hardware is initia lized. when wdtcr1 is set to ?0?, a watchdog timer interrupt (intwdt) is generated. the watchdog timer temporarily stops counting in th e stop mode including the warm-up or idle/sleep mode, and automatically restarts (continues counting) when the stop/idle/sleep mode is inactivated. note:the watchdog timer consists of an internal divider and a two-stage binary counter. when the clear code 4eh is written, only the binary counter is cleared, but not the internal divider . the minimum binary-counter overflow time, that depends on the timing at which the clear code (4eh) is written to the wdtcr2 register, may be 3/ 4 of the time set in wdtcr1. therefore, writ e the clear code using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set to wdtcr1. example :setting the watchdog timer detection time to 2 21 /fc [s], and resetting the cpu malfunction detection ld (wdtcr2), 4eh : clears the binary counters. ld (wdtcr1), 00001101b : wdtt 10, wdtout 1 ld (wdtcr2), 4eh : clears the binary counters (always clears immediately before and after changing wdtt). within 3/4 of wdt detection time : : ld (wdtcr2), 4eh : clears the binary counters. within 3/4 of wdt detection time : : ld (wdtcr2), 4eh : clears the binary counters.
page 55 TMP86FH46ANG note 1: after clearing wdtout to ?0?, the program cannot set it to ?1?. note 2: fc: high-frequency clock [hz], fs : low-frequency clock [hz], *: don?t care note 3: wdtcr1 is a write-only register and must not be used with any of read-modify-write instructions. if wdtcr1 is read, a don?t care is read. note 4: to activate the stop mode, disable the watchdog timer or clear the counter immediately before entering the stop mode. after clearing the counter, clear the counter again immediately after the stop mode is inactivated. note 5: to clear wdten, set the register in accordance wi th the procedures shown in ?1.2.3 watchdog timer disable?. note 1: the disable code is valid only when wdtcr1 = 0. note 2: *: don?t care note 3: the binary counter of the watchdog timer must not be cleared by the interrupt task. note 4: write the clear code 4eh using a cycle shor ter than 3/4 of the time set in wdtcr1. 6.2.2 watchdog timer enable setting wdtcr1 to ?1? enables the watc hdog timer. since wdtcr1 is initialized to ?1? during reset, the watchdog timer is enabled automatically after the reset release. watchdog timer control register 1 wdtcr1 (0034h) 76543210 (atas) (atout) wdten wdtt wdtout (initial value: **11 1001) wdten watchdog timer enable/disable 0: disable (writing the disable code to wdtcr2 is required.) 1: enable write only wdtt watchdog timer detection time [s] normal1/2 mode slow1/2 mode write only dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 00 2 25 /fc 2 17 /fs 2 17 /fs 01 2 23 /fc 2 15 /fs 2 15 fs 10 2 21 fc 2 13 /fs 2 13 fs 11 2 19 /fc 2 11 /fs 2 11 /fs wdtout watchdog timer output select 0: interrupt request 1: reset request write only watchdog timer control register 2 wdtcr2 (0035h) 76543210 (initial value: **** ****) wdtcr2 write watchdog timer control code 4eh: clear the watchdog timer binary counter (clear code) b1h: disable the watchdog timer (disable code) d2h: enable assigning address trap area others: invalid write only
page 56 6. watchdog timer (wdt) 6.2 watchdog timer control TMP86FH46ANG 6.2.3 watchdog timer disable to disable the watchdog timer, set the register in accordance with the fo llowing procedures . setting the reg- ister in other procedures causes a malfunction of the microcontroller. 1. set the interrupt master flag (imf) to ?0?. 2. set wdtcr2 to the clear code (4eh). 3. set wdtcr1 to ?0?. 4. set wdtcr2 to the disable code (b1h). note:while the watchdog timer is disabled, the binary counters of the watchdog timer are cleared. 6.2.4 watchdog time r interrupt (intwdt) when wdtcr1 is cleared to ?0?, a watchdog timer interrupt request (intwdt) is generated by the binary-counter overflow. a watchdog timer interrupt is the non-maskable interr upt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt master flag (imf). when a watchdog timer interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including a watchdog timer interrupt is already accepted, the new watchdog timer interrupt is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending. therefore, if watchdog timer interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the retn instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller. to generate a watchdog timer interrupt, set the stack pointer before setting wdtcr1. example :disabling the watchdog timer di : imf 0 ld (wdtcr2), 04eh : clears the binary coutner ldw (wdtcr1), 0b101h : wdten 0, wdtcr2 disable code table 6-1 watchdog timer detection time (example: fc = 16.0 mhz, fs = 32.768 khz) wdtt watchdog timer detection time[s] normal1/2 mode slow mode dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 00 2.097 4 4 01 524.288 m 1 1 10 131.072 m 250 m 250 m 11 32.768 m 62.5 m 62.5 m example :setting watchdog timer interrupt ld sp, 023fh : sets the stack pointer ld (wdtcr1), 00001000b : wdtout 0
page 57 TMP86FH46ANG 6.2.5 watchdog timer reset when a binary-counter overflow occurs while wdt cr1 is set to ?1?, a watchdog timer reset request is generated. when a watchdog timer reset request is generated, the reset pin outputs a low-level sig- nal and the internal hardware is reset. the reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 s @ fc = 16.0 mhz). note:when a watchdog timer reset is generated in the sl ow1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-fre- quency clock) since the high-frequency cl ock oscillator is restarted. however, when crystals have inaccura- cies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate value because it has slight errors. figure 6-2 watchdog timer interrupt/reset clock binary counter overflow intwdt interrupt request (wdtcr1= "0") 2 17 /fc 2 19 /fc [s] (wdtt=11) write 4e h to wdtcr2 1 2 30 1 2 3 0 internal reset (wdtcr1= "1") wdt reset output (high-z) a reset occurs
page 58 6. watchdog timer (wdt) 6.3 address trap TMP86FH46ANG 6.3 address trap the watchdog timer control register 1 and 2 share the a ddresses with the control regi sters to generate address traps. 6.3.1 selection of address tr ap in internal ram (atas) wdtcr1 specifies whether or not to generate address traps in the inte rnal ram area. to execute an instruction in the internal ram area, clear wdtcr1 to ?0?. to enable the wdtcr1 set- ting, set wdtcr1 and then write d2h to wdtcr2. executing an instruction in the sfr or dbr area generates an address trap unconditionally regardless of the setting in wdtcr1. 6.3.2 selection of operati on at address trap (atout) when an address trap is generated, either the inte rrupt request or the reset request can be selected by wdtcr1. 6.3.3 address trap interrupt (intatrap) while wdtcr1 is ?0?, if the cpu should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip ram (while wdtcr1 is ?1?), dbr or the sfr area, address trap interrupt (intatrap) will be generated. an address trap interrupt is a non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt mas- ter flag (imf). when an address trap interrupt is generated while th e other interrupt including a watchdog timer interrupt is already accepted, the new address trap is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending. therefore, if address trap interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the retn instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller. to generate address trap interrupts, set the stack pointer beforehand. watchdog timer control register 1 wdtcr1 (0034h) 7654 3 21 0 atas atout (wdten) (wdtt) (wdtout) (initial value: **11 1001) atas select address trap generation in the internal ram area 0: generate no address trap 1: generate address traps (after setting atas to ?1?, writing the control code d2h to wdtcr2 is reguired) write only atout select opertion at address trap 0: interrupt request 1: reset request watchdog timer control register 2 wdtcr2 (0035h) 76543210 (initial value: **** ****) wdtcr2 write watchdog timer control code and address trap area control code d2h: enable address trap area selection (atrap control code) 4eh: clear the watchdog timer binary counter (wdt clear code) b1h: disable the watchdog timer (wdt disable code) others: invalid write only
page 59 TMP86FH46ANG 6.3.4 address trap reset while wdtcr1 is ?1?, if the cpu should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip ram (while wdtcr1 is ?1?), dbr or the sfr area, address trap reset will be generated. when an address trap reset request is generated, the reset pin outputs a low-level signal and the internal hardware is reset. the reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 s @ fc = 16.0 mhz). note:when an address trap reset is generated in the slow1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-fre- quency clock) since the high-frequency cl ock oscillator is restarted. however, when crystals have inaccura- cies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate value because it has slight errors.
page 60 6. watchdog timer (wdt) 6.3 address trap TMP86FH46ANG
page 61 TMP86FH46ANG 7. i/o ports the TMP86FH46ANG have 5 parallel inpu t/output ports (33 pins) as follows. each output port contains a latch, which holds the output da ta. all input ports do not have latches, so the external input data should be externally held until the input data is read from outside or reading should be performed several timer before processing. figure 7-1 shows input/output timing examples. external data is read from an i/o po rt in the s1 state of the read cycle during execution of th e read instruction. this timing cannot be recognized from outside, so that transient input such as chattering must be processed by the program. output data changes in the s2 state of the write cycle du ring execution of the instruct ion which writes to an i/o port. note: the positions of the read and write c ycles may vary, depending on the instruction. figure 7-1 input/output timing (example) primary function secondary functions port p0 8-bit i/o port external interrupt input, serial prom mode cotrol input, serial and timer/counter input/output. port p1 6-bit i/o port external interrupt input, and timer/counter input/output. port p2 3-bit i/o port low-frequency resonator connections, exte rnal interrupt input, and stop mode release signal input. port p3 8-bit i/o port analog input, and stop mode release signal input. port p4 8-bit i/o port instruction execution cycle input strobe data input ex: ld a, (x) fetch cycle fetch cycle read cycle s0 s1 s2 s3 s0 s1 s2 s3 s0 s1 s2 s3 instruction execution cycle output strobe data output ex: ld (x), a fetch cycle fetch cycle write cycle s0 s1 s2 s3 s0 s1 s2 s3 s0 s1 s2 s3 (a) input timing (b) output timing old new
page 62 7. i/o ports 7.1 port p0 (p07 to p00) TMP86FH46ANG 7.1 port p0 (p07 to p00) port p0 is an 8-bit input/output port which is also used as an external interrupt input , serial prom mode control input, serial interface input/out put and timer/counter input/output. when used as an input port or a secondary function pins , the respective output latch (p0dr) should be set to ?1?. when used as an output port, the respect ive p0dr bit should be set to ?0?. during reset, the output latch is initial- ized to ?1?. p0 port output latch (p0dr) and p0 port terminal input (p0prd) are located on their respective address. when read the output latch data, the p0dr should be r ead and when read the termin al input data, the p0prd reg- ister should be read. p00 port ( int0 ) can be configured as either an i/o port or as external interrupt input with int0en (bit in eintcr). during reset, p00 port ( int0 ) is configured as an input port. figure 7-2 port 0 p0dr (0000h) r/w 76543210 p07 int4 p06 sck p05 si p04 so p03 txd p02 rxd boot p01 pwm4 tc4 pdo4 ppg4 p00 int0 (initial value: 1111 1111) p0prd (0008h) read only 76543210 p07 p06 p05 p04 p03 p02 p01 p00 output latch control input data output stop outen control output port data (p0prd) output latch data (p0dr) p0i note: i = 7 to 0 dq
page 63 TMP86FH46ANG 7.2 port p1 (p15 to p10) port p1 is an 6-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in one-bit unit under software control. input/output mode is specified by the corresponding bit in the port p1 input/output control register (p1cr). port p1 is configured as an input if its corresponding p1cr bit is cleared to ?0?, and as an output if its corresponding p1cr bit is set to ?1?. during reset, the p1cr is initialized to ?0? and port p1 is input mode. the p1 output latches are also initialized to ?0?. port p1 is also used as an external interrupt input, a timer/counter input/output, and a divider output. when used as an input port, an external interrupt input or a timer/c ounter input, the corresponding bit of p1cr is cleared to ?0?. when used as an output port, a timer/counter output or di vider output, the corresponding bit of p1cr is set to ?1? and beforehand the corresponding output latch should be set to ?1?. data can be written into the output latch regard- less of p1cr contents, therefore initial output data shoul d be written into the output latch before setting p1cr. figure 7-3 port p1 note 1: bit 7 and 6 in p1dr and p1cr are always read as undefined value. note 2: please set the bit 7 and 6 of p1cr to ?1? in an emulator. note 3: ports set to the input mode read the pin states. ports set to the output mode read the output latch. when input pin and out- put pin exist in port p1 together, the contents of the output la tch which is specified as an input mode may be rewritten by executing the bit mani pulation instructions. p1dr (0001h) r/w 76543210 p15 int3 p14 ppg p13 dvo p12 int2 tc1 p11 int1 p10 pwm3 tc3 pdo3 (initial value: **00 0000) p1cr (000dh) 76543210 (initial value: **00 0000) p1cr i/o port for p1 port (specified for each bit) 0: input mode 1: output mode r/w output latch output latch p1cri p1cri input data output control output control input outen stop data input p1i note: i = 5 to 0 d q d q
page 64 7. i/o ports 7.3 port p2 (p22 to p20) TMP86FH46ANG 7.3 port p2 (p22 to p20) port p2 is a 3-bit input/output port. it is also used as an external interr upt, a stop mode release signal input, and low-frequency crys tal oscillator con- nection pins. when used as an input port or a secondary function pins, respective output latch (p2dr) should be set to ?1?. during reset, the p2dr is initialized to ?1?. a low-frequency crystal osci llator (32.768 khz) is connected to pins p21 (xtin) and p22 (xtout) in the dual- clock mode. in the single-clock mode, pins p21 and p22 can be used as normal input/output ports. it is recommended that pin p20 should be used as an exte rnal interrupt input, a stop mode release signal input, or an input port. if it is used as an output port, the interr upt latch is set on the falling edge of the output pulse. p2 port output latch (p2dr) and p2 port terminal input (p2prd) are located on their respective address. when read the output latch data, the p2dr should be r ead and when read the termin al input data, the p2prd reg- ister should be read. if a read in struction is executed for port p2, read data of bits 7 to 3 are unstable. figure 7-4 port 2 76543210 p2dr (0002h) r/w p22 xtout p21 xtin p20 int5 stop (initial value: **** *111) p2prd (000ah) read only 76543210 p22 p21 p20 output latch output latch output latch data input (p20) data input (p21) data output data output control input data input (p21prd) data input (p22) data input (p22prd) data input (p20prd) data output stop outen xten fs p22 (xtout) p21 (xtin) p20 (int5/stop) osc. enable dq dq dq
page 65 TMP86FH46ANG 7.4 port p3 (p37 to p30) port p3 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in one-bit unit under software control. port p3 is also used as an analog input, key on wake up input. input/output mode is specified by the corre- sponding bit in the port p3 input/output cont rol register (p3cr), and adccr1. during reset, p3cr are initialized to ?0? and adccr1 is set to ?1?, therefore port p3 is c onfigured as an input. when used as an analog input, se t an analog input channel to ad ccr1 and clear adccr1 to ?0?. when adccr1 is ?0?, the pin which is specified as an analog input is used as analog input indepen- dent on the value of p3cr and p3dr. when used as an input port or key on wake up input, the corresponding bit of p3cr is cleared to ?0? without spec- ifying as an analog input. when the ad converter is enabled ( adccr1 is ?0?), the data of por t which is selected as an analog input is read ?0?. and the data of port which is not select ed as an analog input is read ?0? or ?1?, depend on the volt- age level. when used as an output port, the corresponding bit of p3 cr is set to ?1? without specifying as an analog input. data can be written into the output latch regardless of p3cr contents, therefore initial output data should be written into the output latch before setting p3cr. the pins not used as analog input can be used as an input/output port. but output instructions should not be exe- cuted to keep a precision. in addition, a variable signal should not be input to an adjacent port to the analog input during ad conversion. figure 7-5 port p3 note: ports set to the input mode read the pin states. ports set to the output mode read the output latch. when input pin and ou t- put pin exist in port p3 together, the contents of the output latch which is specified as an input mode may be rewritten by executing the bit manipulation instructions. p3dr (0003h) r/w 76543210 p37 ain7 stop5 p36 ain6 stop4 p35 ain5 stop3 p34 ain4 stop2 p33 ain3 p32 ain2 p31 ain1 p30 ain0 (initial value: 0000 0000) p3cr (000eh) 76543210 (initial value: 0000 0000) p3cr i/o control (specified for each bit) 0: input mode 1: output mode r/w output latch data input (p3dr) key on wake up analog input data output (p3dr) stop stopj outen ainds sain p3cri p3i note: i = 7 to 0  j = 5 to 2 output latch p3cri input d q d q
page 66 7. i/o ports 7.5 port p4 (p47 to p40)
TMP86FH46ANG 7.5 port p4 (p47 to p40) port p4 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in one-bit unit under software control. input/output mode is specified by the corresponding bit in the port p4 input/output control register (p4cr). port p4 is configured as an input if its corresponding p4cr bit is cleared to ?0?, and as an output if its corresponding p4cr bit is set to ?1?. during reset, the p4cr is initialized to ?0? and port p4 is input mode. the p4 output latches are also initialized to ?0?. when used as an input port, the corr esponding bit of p4cr is cleared to ?0?. when used as an output port, the corresponding bit of p4cr is set to ?1?. data can be written into the output latch regardless of p4cr contents, therefore initial output data sh ould be written into the output latch before setting p4cr. figure 7-6 port p4 note: ports set to the input mode read the pin states. ports set to the output mode read the output latch. when input pin and ou t- put pin exist in port p4 together, the contents of the output latch which is specified as an input mode may be rewritten by executing the bit manipulation instructions. p4dr (0004h) r/w 76543210 p47 p46 p45 p44 p43 p42 p41 p40 (initial value: 0000 0000) p4cr (000fh) 76543210 (initial value: 0000 0000) p4cr i/o control for port p4 (specified for each bit) 0: input mode 1: output mode r/w output latch p4cri input data output stop p4cri outen data input (p4dr) p4i note: i = 7 to 0 dq dq
page 67 TMP86FH46ANG 8. 16-bit timercounter 1 (tc1) 8.1 configuration figure 8-1 timercounter 1 (tc1) :::? pin tc1 :w:?::? mett1 start capture clear source clock ppg output mode write to tc1cr 16-bit up-counter clear tc1drb selector tc1dra tc1cr tc1 control register match inttc1 interript tff1 acap1 tc1ck window mode set toggle q 2 toggle set clear q y a d b c s b a y s tc1s clear mppg1 ppg output mode internal reset s enable mcap1 s y a b tc1s 2 set clear command start decoder external trigger start edge detector note: function i/o may not operate depending on i/o port setting. for more details, see the chapter "i/o port". port (note) q pulse width measurement mode falling rising trigger external cmp 16-bit timer register a, b pulse width measurement mode port (note) fc/2 11, fs/2 3 fc/2 7 fc/2 3
page 68 8. 16-bit timercounter 1 (tc1) 8.2 timercounter control TMP86FH46ANG 8.2 timercounter control the timercounter 1 is controlled by the timercounter 1 control register (tc1cr) and two 16-bit timer registers (tc1dra and tc1drb). note 1: fc: high-frequency clock [hz], fs: low-frequency clock [hz] note 2: the timer register consists of two shift registers. a va lue set in the timer register becomes valid at the rising edge o f the first source clock pulse that occurs after the upper byte (t c1drah and tc1drbh) is written. therefore, write the lower byte and the upper byte in this order (it is recommended to write the register with a 16-bit acce ss instruction). writing only the lower byte (tc1dral and tc1drbl) does not enable the setting of the timer register. note 3: to set the mode, source clock, ppg output control and time r f/f control, write to tc1cr1 during tc1s=00. set the timer f/f1 control until the first timer start after setting the ppg mode. timer register 1514131211109876543210 tc1dra (0011h, 0010h) tc1drah (0011h) tc1dral (0010h) (initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111) read/write tc1drb (0013h, 0012h) tc1drbh (0013h) tc1drbl (0012h) (initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111) read/write (write e nabled only in the ppg output mode) timercounter 1 control register tc1cr (0014h) 76543210 tff1 acap1 mcap1 mett1 mppg1 tc1s tc1ck tc1m read/write (initial value: 0000 0000) tff1 timer f/f1 control 0: clear 1: set r/w acap1 auto capture control 0:auto-capture disable 1:auto-capture enable r/w mcap1 pulse width measure- ment mode control 0:double edge capture 1:single edge capture mett1 external trigger timer mode control 0:trigger start 1:trigger start and stop mppg1 ppg output control 0:continuous pulse generation 1:one-shot tc1s tc1 start control timer extrig- ger event win- dow pulse ppg r/w 00: stop and counter clear oooooo 01: command start o????o 10: rising edge start (ex-trigger/pulse/ppg) rising edge count (event) positive logic count (window) ? ooooo 11: falling edge start (ex-trigger/pulse/ppg) falling edge count (event) negative logic count (window) ? ooooo tc1ck tc1 source clock select [hz] normal1/2, idle1/2 mode divider slow, sleep mode r/w dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 00 fc/2 11 fs/2 3 dv9 fs/2 3 01 fc/2 7 fc/2 7 dv5 ? 10 fc/2 3 fc/2 3 dv1 ? 11 external clock (tc1 pin input) tc1m tc1 operating mode select 00: timer/external trigger timer/event counter mode 01: window mode 10: pulse width measurement mode 11: ppg (programmable pulse generate) output mode r/w
page 69 TMP86FH46ANG note 4: auto-capture can be used only in t he timer, event counter, and window modes. note 5: to set the timer registers, the following relationship must be satisfied. tc1dra > tc1drb > 1 (ppg output mode), tc1dra > 1 (other modes) note 6: set tff1 to ?0? in the mode except ppg output mode. note 7: set tc1drb after setting tc1m to the ppg output mode. note 8: when the stop mode is entered, the start control (tc1s) is cleared to ?00? automatically, and the timer stops. after the stop mode is exited, set the tc1s to use the timer counter again. note 9: use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of tc1. a captured value may not be fixed if it's read after th e execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. note 10:since the up-counter value is captured into tc1drb by the source clock of up-counter after setting tc1cr to "1". therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading tc1drb for the first time.
page 70 8. 16-bit timercounter 1 (tc1) 8.3 function TMP86FH46ANG 8.3 function timercounter 1 has six types of operating modes: timer, external trigger timer, event counter, window, pulse width measurement, programmable pulse generator output modes. 8.3.1 timer mode in the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. when a match between the up-counter and the timer register 1a (tc1dra) value is detected, an inttc1 interr upt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. after being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting. setting tc1cr to ?1? captures the up-counter value into the timer reg- ister 1b (tc1drb) with the auto-capture function. use the auto-capture function in the operative conditio n of tc1. a cap- tured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disa ble. read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. since the up-counter value is captured into tc1drb by the source clock of up-counter after setting tc1cr to "1". therefore, to read the captured value, wait at leas t one cycle of the internal source clock before reading tc1drb for the first time. note: since the up-counter value is captured into tc1drb by the source clock of up-counter after setting tc1cr to "1". therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading tc1drb for the first time. table 8-1 internal source clock for timercounter 1 (example: fc = 16 mhz, fs = 32.768 khz) tc1ck normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow, sleep mode dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 resolution [ s] maximum time setting [s] resolution [ s] maximum time setting [s] resolution [ s] maximum time set- ting [s] 00 128 8.39 244.14 16.0 244.14 16.0 01 8.0 0.524 8.0 0.524 ? ? 10 0.5 32.77 m 0.5 32.77 m ? ? example 1 :setting the timer mode with source clock fc/2 11 [hz] and generating an interrupt 1 second later (fc = 16 mhz, tbtcr = ?0?) ldw (tc1dra), 1e84h ; sets the timer register (1 s 2 11 /fc = 1e84h) di ; imf = ?0? set (eirl). 7 ; enables inttc1 ei ; imf = ?1? ld (tc1cr), 00000000b ; selects the source clock and mode ld (tc1cr), 00010000b ; starts tc1 example 2 :auto-capture ld (tc1cr), 01010000b ; acap1 1 : : ld wa, (tc1drb) ; reads the capture value
page 71 TMP86FH46ANG figure 8-2 timer mode timing chart match detect acap1 tc1drb tc1dra inttc1 interruput request source clock counter source clock counter ? (a) timer mode (b) auto-capture ? 7 6 345 0 timer start 12 3 2 1 4 0 counter clear capture n + 1 n n n m + 2 m + 1 m m capture m + 2 m + 1 n + 1 n m ? 1 m ? 1 m ? 2 n ? 1 n ? 1 n ? 1
page 72 8. 16-bit timercounter 1 (tc1) 8.3 function TMP86FH46ANG 8.3.2 external trigger timer mode in the external trigger timer mode, the up-counter starts counting by the input pulse triggering of the tc1 pin, and counts up at the edge of the internal clock. for the trigger edge used to start counting, either the rising or falling edge is defined in tc1cr. ? when tc1cr is set to ?1? (trigger st art and stop) when a match between the up-counter and the tc1dra value is detected after the timer starts, the up-counter is cleared and halted and an inttc1 interrupt request is generated. if the edge opposite to trigger edge is detected before detecting a match between the up-counter and the tc1dra, the up-counter is cleared and ha lted without generating an interrupt request. therefore, this mode can be used to det ect exceeding the specified pulse by interrupt. after being halted, the up-count er restarts counting when th e trigger edge is detected. ? when tc1cr is set to ?0? (trigger start) when a match between the up-counter and the tc1dra value is detected after the timer starts, the up-counter is cleared and halted and an inttc1 interrupt request is generated. the edge opposite to the trigger edge has no effect in count up. the trigger edge for the next count- ing is ignored if detecting it before detectin g a match between the up-counter and the tc1dra. since the tc1 pin input has the noise rejection, pulses of 4/fc [s] or less are rejected as noise. a pulse width of 12/fc [s] or more is required to ensure edge detectio n. the rejection circuit is turned off in the slow1/2 or sleep1/2 mode, but a pulse width of one machine cycl e or more is required. example 1 :generating an interrupt 1 ms after the rising edge of the input pulse to the tc1 pin (fc =16 mhz) ldw (tc1dra), 007dh ; 1ms 2 7 /fc = 7dh di ; imf = ?0? set (eirl). 7 ; enables inttc1 interrupt ei ; imf = ?1? ld (tc1cr), 00000100b ; selects the source clock and mode ld (tc1cr), 00100100b ; starts tc1 external trigger, mett1 = 0 example 2 :generating an interrupt when the low-level pulse with 4 ms or more width is input to the tc1 pin (fc =16 mhz) ldw (tc1dra), 01f4h ; 4 ms 2 7 /fc = 1f4h di ; imf = ?0? set (eirl). 7 ; enables inttc1 interrupt ei ; imf = ?1? ld (tc1cr), 00000100b ; selects the source clock and mode ld (tc1cr), 01110100b ; starts tc1 external trigger, mett1 = 0
page 73 TMP86FH46ANG figure 8-3 external tri gger timer mode timing chart inttc1 interrupt request source clock up-counter tc1dra tc1 pin input inttc1 interrupt request source clock up-counter tc1dra tc1 pin input 0 at the rising edge (tc1s = 10) at the rising edge (tc1s = 10) (a) trigger start (mett1 = 0) count start match detect count start 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 n (b) trigger start and stop (mett1 = 1) count start count start 0 1 2 3 m 0 n n 0 count clear note: m < n count clear 1 2 3 1 n m ? 1 n ? 1 match detect count clear
page 74 8. 16-bit timercounter 1 (tc1) 8.3 function TMP86FH46ANG 8.3.3 event counter mode in the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the edge of the input pulse to the tc1 pin. either the rising or falling edge of the input pulse is se lected as the count up edge in tc1cr. when a match between the up-counter and the tc1dra va lue is detected, an inttc1 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. after being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at each edge of the input pulse to the tc1 pin. since a match between the up-counter and the value set to tc1dra is detected at the edge opposite to the selected edge, an inttc1 interrupt request is generated after a match of the value at the edge opposite to the selected edge. two or more machine cycles are required for th e low-or high-level pulse input to the tc1 pin. setting tc1cr to ?1? captures the up-counter value into tc1drb with the auto capture function. use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of tc1. a captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. read the captu re value in a captu re enabled condi- tion. since the up-counter value is captured into tc1drb by the source clock of up-counter after setting tc1cr to "1". theref ore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading tc1drb for the first time. figure 8-4 event c ounter mode timing chart table 8-2 input pulse width to tc1 pin minimum pulse width [s] normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode high-going 2 3 /fc 2 3 /fs low-going 2 3 /fc 2 3 /fs at the rising edge (tc1s = 10) inttc1 interrput request tc1 pin input up-counter tc1dra ? 2 1 0 n timer start 2 1 0 n match detect counter clear n ? 1
page 75 TMP86FH46ANG 8.3.4 window mode in the window mode, the up-counter counts up at the rising edge of the pulse that is logical anded product of the input pulse to the tc1 pin (window pulse) and the internal source clock. eith er the positive logic (count up during high-going pulse) or negative logic (count up during low-going pulse) can be selected. when a match between the up-counter and the tc1dra va lue is detected, an inttc1 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. define the window pulse to the frequency which is sufficiently lower than the internal source clock pro- grammed with tc1cr. figure 8-5 window mode timing chart match detect tc1dra inttc1 interrput request interrput request internal clock counter tc1dra tc1 pin input internal clock counter tc1 pin input inttc1 (a) positive logic (tc1s = 10) (b) negative logic (tc1s = 11) ? ? match detect 1 0 7 47 5 46 31 2 1 0 7 5 3 6 2 0 2 3 counter clear timer start 890 1 9 timer start counter clear count start count stop count start count start count stop count start
page 76 8. 16-bit timercounter 1 (tc1) 8.3 function TMP86FH46ANG 8.3.5 pulse width measurement mode in the pulse width measurement mode, the up-counter starts counting by the input pulse triggering of the tc1 pin, and counts up at the edge of the internal clock. either the rising or falling edge of the internal clock is selected as the trigger edge in tc1cr< tc1s>. either the single- or double-e dge capture is selected as the trig- ger edge in tc1cr. ? when tc1cr is set to ?1? (single-edge capture) either high- or low-level input pulse width can be measured. to measure the high-level input pulse width, set the rising edge to tc1cr. to measure the low-level input pulse width, set the falling edge to tc1cr. when detecting the edge opposite to the trigger ed ge used to start countin g after the timer starts, the up-counter captures the up-counter value in to tc1drb and generates an inttc1 interrupt request. the up-counter is cleared at this time, a nd then restarts counting wh en detecting the trigger edge used to start counting. ? when tc1cr is set to ?0? (double-edge capture) the cycle starting with either the high- or low-going input pulse can be measured. to measure the cycle starting with the high-going pulse, set the ri sing edge to tc1cr. to measure the cycle starting with the low-going pulse, set the falling edge to tc1cr. when detecting the edge opposite to the trigger ed ge used to start countin g after the timer starts, the up-counter captures the up-counter value in to tc1drb and generates an inttc1 interrupt request. the up-counter continues counting up, a nd captures the up-counter value into tc1drb and generates an inttc1 interrupt request when detecting the trigger edge used to start counting. the up-counter is cleared at this time, and then continues counting. note 1: the captured value must be read from tc1drb until the next trigger edge is detected. if not read, the cap- tured value becomes a don?t care. it is recommended to us e a 16-bit access instruction to read the captured value from tc1drb. note 2: for the single-edge capture, the counter after capt uring the value stops at ?1? until detecting the next edge. therefore, the second captured value is ?1? larger than the captured value i mmediately after counting starts. note 3: the first captured value after the timer starts may be read incorrectively, therefore, ignore the first captured value.
page 77 TMP86FH46ANG example :duty measurem ent (resolution fc/2 7 [hz]) clr (inttc1sw). 0 ; inttc1 serv ice switch initial setting address set to convert inttc1sw at each inttc1 ld (tc1cr), 00000110b ; sets the tc1 mode and source clock di ; imf = ?0? set (eirl). 7 ; enables inttc1 ei ; imf = ?1? ld (tc1cr), 00100110b ; starts tc1 with an external trigger at mcap1 = 0 : pinttc1: cpl (inttc1sw). 0 ; inttc1 interrupt, inverts and tests inttc1 service switch jrs f, sinttc1 ld a, (tc1drbl) ; reads tc1drb (high-level pulse width) ld w,(tc1drbh) ld (hpulse), wa ; stores high-level pulse width in ram reti sinttc1: ld a, (tc1drbl) ; reads tc1drb (cycle) ld w,(tc1drbh) ld (width), wa ; stores cycle in ram : reti ; duty calculation : vinttc1: dw pinttc1 ; inttc1 interrupt vector width hpulse tc1 pin inttc1 interrupt request inttc1sw
page 78 8. 16-bit timercounter 1 (tc1) 8.3 function TMP86FH46ANG figure 8-6 pulse wi dth measurement mode tc1drb inttc1 interrupt request interrupt request tc1 pin input counter internal clock (mcap1 = "1") 23 n count start count start trigger (tc1s = "10") 1 3 2 1 4 0 n 0 capture n - 1 tc1drb inttc1 tc1 pin input counter internal clock (mcap1 = "0") 12 n count start count start (tc1s = "10") 3 2 1 4 0 n capture capture n + 1 m - 2 n + 3 n + 2 n + 1 m - 1 m0 m [application] high-or low-level pulse width measurement [application] (1) cycle/frequency measurement (2) duty measurement (a) single-edge capture (b) double-edge capture
page 79 TMP86FH46ANG 8.3.6 programmable pulse generate (ppg) output mode in the programmable pulse generation (ppg) mode, an arbitrary duty pulse is generated by counting per- formed in the internal clock. to start the timer, tc1c r specifies either the edge of the input pulse to the tc1 pin or the command start. tc1cr specifies whether a duty pulse is produced continuously or not (one-shot pulse). ? when tc1cr is set to ?0? (continuous pulse generation) when a match between the up-counter and the tc1drb value is detected after the timer starts, the level of the ppg pin is inverted and an inttc1 interrupt request is generated. the up-counter contin- ues counting. when a match between the up-counter and the tc1dra value is detected, the level of the ppg pin is inverted and an inttc1 interrupt requ est is generated. the up-counter is cleared at this time, and then continues counting and pulse generation. when tc1s is cleared to ?00? during ppg output, the ppg pin retains the level immediately before the counter stops. ? when tc1cr is set to ?1? (one-shot pulse generation) when a match between the up-counter and the tc1drb value is detected after the timer starts, the level of the ppg pin is inverted and an inttc1 interrupt request is generated. the up-counter contin- ues counting. when a match between the up-counter and the tc1dra value is detected, the level of the ppg pin is inverted and an inttc1 interrupt re quest is generated. tc1cr is cleared to ?00? automatically at this time, and the timer stops. the pulse generated by ppg retains the same level as that when the timer stops. since the output level of the ppg pin can be set with tc1cr when the timer starts, a positive or neg- ative pulse can be generated. since the inverted level of the timer f/f1 output level is output to the ppg pin, specify tc1cr to ?0? to set the high level to the ppg pin, and ?1? to set the low level to the ppg pin. upon reset, the timer f/f1 is initialized to ?0?. note 1: to change tc1dra or tc1drb during a run of the ti mer, set a value sufficiently larger than the count value of the counter. setting a value smaller than the count value of the counter during a run of the timer may generate a pulse different from that specified. note 2: do not change tc1cr during a run of the ti mer. tc1cr can be set correctly only at initial- ization (after reset). when the timer stops during pp g, tc1cr can not be set correctly from this point onward if the ppg output has the level which is inverted of the level when the timer starts. (setting tc1cr specifies the timer f/f1 to the level inverted of the programmed value.) therefore, the timer f/f1 needs to be initialized to ensure an arbitrar y level of the ppg output. to initialize the timer f/f1, change tc1cr to the timer mode (it is not required to start the timer mode), and then set the ppg mode. set tc1cr at this time. note 3: in the ppg mode, the follow ing relationship must be satisfied. tc1dra > tc1drb note 4: set tc1drb after changing the mode of tc1m to the ppg mode.
page 80 8. 16-bit timercounter 1 (tc1) 8.3 function TMP86FH46ANG figure 8-7 ppg output example :generating a pulse which is high-going for 800 s and low-going for 200 s (fc = 16 mhz) setting port ld (tc1cr), 10000111b ; sets the ppg mode, selects the source clock ldw (tc1dra), 007dh ; sets the cycle (1 ms 2 7 /fc ms = 007dh) ldw (tc1drb), 0019h ; sets the low-level pulse width (200 s 2 7 /fc = 0019h) ld (tc1cr), 10010111b ; starts the timer example :after stopping ppg, setting the ppg pin to a high-level to restart ppg (fc = 16 mhz) setting port ld (tc1cr), 10000111b ; sets the ppg mode, selects the source clock ldw (tc1dra), 007dh ; sets the cycle (1 ms 2 7 /fc s = 007dh) ldw (tc1drb), 0019h ; sets the low-level pulse width (200 s 2 7 /fc = 0019h) ld (tc1cr), 10010111b ; starts the timer :: ld (tc1cr), 10000111b ; stops the timer ld (tc1cr), 10000100b ; sets the timer mode ld (tc1cr), 00000111b ; sets the ppg mode, tff1 = 0 ld (tc1cr), 00010111b ; starts the timer q r d ppg pin function output port output enable i/o port output latch shared with ppg output data output toggle set clear q tc1cr write to tc1cr internal reset match to tc1drb match to tc1dra tc1cr clear timer f/f1 inttc1 interrupt request
page 81 TMP86FH46ANG figure 8-8 pp g mode timing chart inttc1 tc1dra internal clock counter tc1drb tc1dra ppg pin output 0 inttc1 interrupt request interrupt request 12 m01 2 n m01 n 2 n n + 1 n + 1 m (a) continuous pulse generation (tc1s = 01) tc1drb trigger count start timer start counter internal clock tc1 pin input ppg pin output 0 1m n n n + 1 m 0 (b) one-shot pulse generation (tc1s = 10) match detect note: m > n note: m > n [application] one-shot pulse output
page 82 8. 16-bit timercounter 1 (tc1) 8.3 function TMP86FH46ANG
page 83 TMP86FH46ANG 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration figure 9-1 8-bit timercouter 3, 4 8-bit up-counter decode en a y b s a b y c d e f g h s a y b s s a y b toggle q set clear 8-bit up-counter a b y c d e f g h s decode en toggle q set clear pwm mode pdo, ppg mode pdo mode pwm, ppg mode pwm mode pwm mode 16-bit mode 16-bit mode 16-bit mode 16-bit mode timer, event counter mode overflow overflow timer, event couter mode 16-bit mode clear clear fc/2 7 fc/2 5 fc/2 3 fc/2 fc fc/2 7 fc/2 5 fc/2 3 fc/2 fc pdo, pwm, ppg mode pdo, pwm mode 16-bit mode fc/2 11 or fs/2 3 fc/2 11 or fs/2 3 fs fs tc4cr tc3cr ttreg4 pwreg4 ttreg3 pwreg3 tc3 pin tc4 pin tc4s tc3s inttc3 interrupt request inttc4 interrupt request tff4 tff3 pdo 4/pwm 4/ ppg 4 pin pdo 3/pwm 3/ pin tc3ck tc4ck tc3m tc3s tff3 tc4m tc4s tff4 timer f/f4 timer f/f3
page 84 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FH46ANG 9.2 timercounter control the timercounter 3 is controlled by the timercounter 3 control register (tc3cr) and two 8-bit timer registers (ttreg3, pwreg3). note 1: do not change the timer register (t treg3) setting while the timer is running. note 2: do not change the timer register (pwreg3) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit pwm modes while the timer is running. note 1: fc: high-frequency clock [hz] fs: low-frequency clock[hz] note 2: do not change the tc3m, tc3ck and tff3 settings while the timer is running. note 3: to stop the timer operation (tc3s= 1 0), do not change the tc3m, tc3ck and tff3 settings. to start the timer opera- tion (tc3s= 0 1), tc3m, tc3ck and tff3 can be programmed. note 4: to use the timercounter in the 16-bit mode, set th e operating mode by programming tc4cr, where tc3m must be fixed to 011. note 5: to use the timercounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming tc3ck. set the timer start control and timer f/f control by programming tc4 cr and tc4cr, respectively. note 6: the operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. for the detailed descriptions, see table 9-1 and table 9-2. timercounter 3 timer register ttreg3 (0018h) r/w 76543210 (initial value: 1111 1111) pwreg3 (001ah) r/w 76543210 (initial value: 1111 1111) timercounter 3 control register tc3cr (0016h) 76543210 tff3 tc3ck tc3s tc3m (initial value: 0000 0000) tff3 time f/f3 control 0: 1: clear set r/w tc3ck operating clock selection [hz] normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2 sleep1/2 mode r/w dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 000 fc/2 11 fs/2 3 fs/2 3 001 fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ? 010 fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ? 011 fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 100 fs fs fs 101 fc/2 fc/2 ? 110 fc fc fc (note 8) 111 tc3 pin input tc3s tc3 start control 0: 1: operation stop and counter clear operation start r/w tc3m tc3m operating mode select 000: 001: 010: 011: 1**: 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (pdo) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output mode 16-bit mode (each mode is selectable with tc4m.) reserved r/w
page 85 TMP86FH46ANG note 7: the timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. for the detailed descriptions, see table 9- 3. note 8: the operating clock fc in t he slow or sleep mode can be used only as the high-frequency warm-up mode.
page 86 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FH46ANG the timercounter 4 is controlled by the timercounter 4 control register (tc4cr) and two 8-bit timer registers (ttreg4 and pwreg4). note 1: do not change the timer register (t treg4) setting while the timer is running. note 2: do not change the timer register (pwreg4) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit pwm modes while the timer is running. note 1: fc: high-frequency clock [hz] fs: low-frequency clock [hz] note 2: do not change the tc4m, tc4ck and tff4 settings while the timer is running. note 3: to stop the timer operation (tc4s= 1 0), do not change the tc4m, tc4ck and tff4 settings. to start the timer operation (tc4s= 0 1), tc4m, tc4ck and tff4 can be programmed. note 4: when tc4m= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the sour ce clock becomes the tc4 over flow signal regardless of the tc3ck setting. note 5: to use the timercounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming tc4m, where tc3cr must be set to 011. timercounter 4 timer register ttreg4 (0019h) r/w 76543210 (initial value: 1111 1111) pwreg4 (001bh) r/w 76543210 (initial value: 1111 1111) timercounter 4 control register tc4cr (0017h) 76543210 tff4 tc4ck tc4s tc4m (initial value: 0000 0000) tff4 timer f/f4 control 0: 1: clear set r/w tc4ck operating clock selection [hz] normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2 sleep1/2 mode r/w dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 000 fc/2 11 fs/2 3 fs/2 3 001 fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ? 010 fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ? 011 fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 100 fs fs fs 101 fc/2 fc/2 ? 110 fc fc ? 111 tc4 pin input tc4s tc4 start control 0: 1: operation stop and counter clear operation start r/w tc4m tc4m operating mode select 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (pdo) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output mode reserved 16-bit timer/event counter mode warm-up counter mode 16-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output mode 16-bit ppg mode r/w
page 87 TMP86FH46ANG note 6: to the timercounter in the 16-bit mode, select the so urce clock by programming tc3cr. set the timer start control and timer f/f control by prog ramming tc4s and tff4, respectively. note 7: the operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. for the detailed descriptions, see table 9-1 and table 9-2. note 8: the timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. for the detailed descriptions, see table 9- 3. note 1: for 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm- up counter, 16-bit pwm and 16-bit ppg), set its source clock on lower bit (tc3ck). note 2: : available source clock table 9-1 operating mode and selectable source clock (normal1/2 and idle1/2 modes) operating mode fc/2 11 or fs/2 3 fc/2 7 fc/2 5 fc/2 3 fs fc/2 fc tc3 pin input tc4 pin input 8-bit timer ??? ????? 8-bit event counter ??????? 8-bit pdo ??? ????? 8-bit pwm ?????? ?? 16-bit timer ??? ????? 16-bit event counter ??????? ? warm-up counter ???? ???? 16-bit pwm ??????? ? 16-bit ppg ??? ??? ? table 9-2 operating mode an d selectable source clock (slow1/2 and sleep1/2 modes) operating mode fc/2 11 or fs/2 3 fc/2 7 fc/2 5 fc/2 3 fs fc/2 fc tc3 pin input tc4 pin input 8-bit timer ???????? 8-bit event counter ??????? ? 8-bit pdo ???????? 8-bit pwm ??? ???? 16-bit timer ???????? 16-bit event counter ??????? ? warm-up counter ?????? ?? 16-bit pwm ??? ?? ? 16-bit ppg ?????? ? note1: note2: for 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit pwm and 16-bit ppg), set its source clock on lower bit (tc3ck). : available source clock
page 88 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FH46ANG note: n = 3 to 4 table 9-3 constraints on register values being compared operating mode register value 8-bit timer/event counter 1 (ttregn) 255 8-bit pdo 1 (ttregn) 255 8-bit pwm 2 (pwregn) 254 16-bit timer/event counter 1 (ttreg4, 3) 65535 warm-up counter 256 (ttreg4, 3) 65535 16-bit pwm 2 (pwreg4, 3) 65534 16-bit ppg 1 (pwreg4, 3) < (ttreg4, 3) 65535 and (pwreg4, 3) + 1 < (ttreg4, 3)
page 89 TMP86FH46ANG 9.3 function the timercounter 3 and 4 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit ev ent counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (pdo), 8- bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output modes. the time rcounter 3 and 4 (tc3, 4) are cascadable to form a 16- bit timer. the 16-bit timer has the operat ing modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit pulse width modulation (pwm) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (ppg) modes. 9.3.1 8-bit timer mode (tc3 and 4) in the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. when a match between the up-counter and the timer register j (ttregj) value is detected, an inttcj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. after being cl eared, the up-counter restarts counting. note 1: in the timer mode, fix tcjcr to 0. if not fixed, the pdoj, pwmj and ppgj pins may output pulses. note 2: in the timer mode, do not change the ttregj setting while the timer is running. si nce ttregj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in ttregj is in effect immediately after the programming. therefore, if ttregi is changed while the timer is r unning, an expected operation may not be obtained. note 3: j = 3, 4 table 9-4 source clock for timercounter 3, 4 (internal clock) source clock resolution repeated cycle normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 fc/2 11 [hz] fs/2 3 [hz] fs/2 3 [hz] 128 s244.14 s 32.6 ms 62.3 ms fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ?8 s ? 2.0 ms ? fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ?2 s ? 510 s? fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 500 ns ? 127.5 s? example :setting the timer mode with source clock fc/2 7 hz and generating an interrupt 80 s later (timercounter4, fc = 16.0 mhz) ld (ttreg4), 0ah : sets the timer register (80 s 2 7 /fc = 0ah). di set (eirh). 1 : enables inttc4 interrupt. ei ld (tc4cr), 00010000b : sets the operating cock to fc/2 7 , and 8-bit timer mode. ld (tc4cr), 00011000b : starts tc4.
page 90 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FH46ANG figure 9-2 8-bit timer mode timing chart (tc4) 9.3.2 8-bit event counter mode (tc3, 4) in the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the tcj pin. when a match between the up-counter and the ttregj valu e is detected, an inttcj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. after being cleared, the up-counter restarts counti ng at the falling edge of the input pulse to the tcj pin. two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the tcj pin. therefore, a maximum freque ncy to be supplied is fc/2 4 hz in the normal1/2 or idle1/2 mode, and fs/2 4 hz in the slow1/2 or sleep1/2 mode. note 1: in the event counter mode, fix tcjcr to 0. if not fixed, the pdoj, pwmj and ppgj pins may output pulses. note 2: in the event counter mode, do not change the ttre gj setting while the timer is running. since ttregj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in ttregj is in effect immediately after the programming. therefore, if ttregi is changed whil e the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. note 3: j = 3, 4 figure 9-3 8-bit event count er mode timing chart (tc4) 9.3.3 8-bit programmable divi der output (pdo) mode (tc3, 4) this mode is used to generate a pu lse with a 50% duty cycle from the pdoj pin. in the pdo mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. when a match between the up-counter and the ttregj value is detected , the logic level output from the pdoj pin is switched to the opposite state and the up-counter is cleared. the inttcj interrupt request is generated at the time. the logic state opposite to the timer f/fj logic level is output from the pdoj pin. an arbitrary value can be set to the timer f/fj by tcjcr. upon reset, the timer f/fj value is initialized to 0. to use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the i/o port to 1. 1 2 3 n-1 n 0 1 n-1 n 2 0 1 2 0 n ? internal source clock counter match detect counter clear match detect counter clear tc4cr ttreg4 inttc4 interrupt request 1 0 2 n-1 n 0 1 2 0 n ? counter match detect counter clear n-1 n 2 0 1 match detect counter clear tc4cr ttreg4 inttc4 interrupt request tc4 pin input
page 91 TMP86FH46ANG note 1: in the programmable divider output mode, do not change the ttregj setting while the timer is running. since ttregj is not in the shift register configur ation in the programmable divider output mode, the new value programmed in ttregj is in effect immediatel y after programming. therefore, if ttregi is changed while the timer is running, an ex pected operation may not be obtained. note 2: when the timer is stopped during pdo output, the pdoj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. to change the output status, program tcjcr after the timer is stopped. do not change the tcjcr setting upon stopping of the timer. example: fixing the pdoj pin to the high level when the timercounter is stopped clr (tcjcr).3: stops the timer. clr (tcjcr).7: sets the pdoj pin to the high level. note 3: j = 3, 4 example :generating 1024 hz pulse using tc4 (fc = 16.0 mhz) setting port ld (ttreg4), 3dh : 1/1024 2 7 /fc 2 = 3dh ld (tc4cr), 00010001b : sets the operating clock to fc/2 7 , and 8-bit pdo mode. ld (tc4cr), 00011001b : starts tc4.
page 92 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FH46ANG figure 9-4 8-bit pdo mode timing chart (tc4) 12 0 n 0 n 0 n 0 n 0 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 0 n ? internal source clock counter match detect match detect match detect match detect held at the level when the timer is stopped set f/f write of "1" tc4cr tc4cr ttreg4 timer f/f4 pdo 4 pin inttc4 interrupt request
page 93 TMP86FH46ANG 9.3.4 8-bit pulse wi dth modulation (pwm) output mode (tc3, 4) this mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (pwm) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. when a match between the up-counter and the pwregj value is detected, the logic level output from the timer f/fj is switched to the opposite state. the counter continues counting. the logic level output from the timer f/fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-co unter overflow, and the counter is cleared. the inttcj interrupt request is generated at this time. since the initial value can be set to the timer f/fj by tcjcr, positive and negative pulses can be gen- erated. upon reset, the tim er f/fj is cleared to 0. (the logic level output from the pwmj pin is the opposite to the timer f/fj logic level.) since pwregj in the pwm mode is se rially connected to the shift regist er, the value set to pwregj can be changed while the timer is running. the value set to pwregj during a run of the timer is shifted by the inttcj interrupt request and loaded into pwregj. while the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immedi- ately after the programming of pwre gj. if executing the read instruction to pwregj during pwm output, the value in the shift register is read, but not the valu e set in pwregj. therefore, after writing to pwregj, the reading data of pwregj is previo us value until inttcj is generated. for the pin used for pwm output, the output latch of the i/o port must be set to 1. note 1: in the pwm mode, program the timer register pw regj immediately after the inttcj interrupt request is generated (normally in the inttcj interrupt service r outine.) if the programming of pwregj and the inter- rupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse different from the programmed value until the next inttcj interrupt request is generated. note 2: when the timer is stopped during pwm output, the pwmj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. to change the output status, program tcjcr after the timer is stopped. do not change the tcjcr upon stopping of the timer. example: fixing the pwmj pin to the high level when the timercounter is stopped clr (tcjcr).3: stops the timer. clr (tcjcr).7: sets the pwmj pin to the high level. note 3: to enter the stop mode during pwm output, stop the timer and then enter the stop mode. if the stop mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is out- put from the pwmj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the stop mode. note 4: j = 3, 4 table 9-5 pwm output mode source clock resolution repeated cycle normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 fc/2 11 [hz] fs/2 3 [hz] fs/2 3 [hz] 128 s244.14 s 32.8 ms 62.5 ms fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ?8 s?2.05 ms? fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ?2 s ? 512 s? fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 500 ns ? 128 s? fs fs fs 30.5 s30.5 s 7.81 ms 7.81 ms fc/2 fc/2 ? 125 ns ? 32 s? fc fc ? 62.5 ns ? 16 s?
page 94 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FH46ANG figure 9-5 8-bit pwm mo de timing chart (tc4) 1 0 n n+1 ff 0 n n+1 ff 0 1 m m+1 ff 0 1 1 p n ? internal source clock counter write to pwreg4 write to pwreg4 m p m p n ? shift registar shift shift shift shift match detect match detect one cycle period match detect match detect n m p n tc4cr tc4cr pwreg4 timer f/f4 pwm 4 pin inttc4 interrupt request
page 95 TMP86FH46ANG 9.3.5 16-bit timer mode (tc3 and 4) in the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. the timercounter 3 and 4 are cascad- able to form a 16-bit timer. when a match between the up-counter and the timer regi ster (ttreg3, ttreg4) valu e is detected after the timer is started by setting tc4cr to 1, an inttc 4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. after being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. pr ogram the upper byte and lower byte in this order in the timer register. (programming only the uppe r or lower byte should not be attempted.) note 1: in the timer mode, fix tcjcr to 0. if not fixed, the pdoj , pwmj , and ppgj pins may output a pulse. note 2: in the timer mode, do not change the ttregj setting while the timer is running. si nce ttregj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in ttregj is in effect immediately after programming of ttregj. therefore, if ttreg j is changed while the time r is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. note 3: j = 3, 4 figure 9-6 16-bit timer m ode timing chart (tc3 and tc4) table 9-6 source clock for 16-bit timer mode source clock resolution repeated cycle normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 fc/2 11 fs/2 3 fs/2 3 128 s244.14 s 8.39 s 16 s fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ?8 s ? 524.3 ms ? fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ?2 s ? 131.1 ms ? fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 500 ns ? 32.8 ms ? example :setting the timer mode with source clock fc/2 7 hz, and generating an interrupt 300 ms later (fc = 16.0 mhz) ldw (ttreg3), 927ch : sets the timer register (300 ms 2 7 /fc = 927ch). di set (eirh). 1 : enables inttc4 interrupt. ei ld (tc3cr), 13h :sets the operating cock to fc/2 7 , and 16-bit timer mode (lower byte). ld (tc4cr), 04h : sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte). ld (tc4cr), 0ch : starts the timer. 1 0 2 3 mn-1 mn 0 1 mn-1 mn 2 0 1 2 0 n ? m ? internal source clock counter match detect counter clear match detect counter clear tc4cr ttreg3 (lower byte) inttc4 interrupt request ttreg4 (upper byte)
page 96 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FH46ANG 9.3.6 16-bit event c ounter mode (tc3 and 4) 9.3.7 16-bit pulse width modulatio n (pwm) output mode (tc3 and 4) this mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (pwm) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. the timercounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form the 16-bit pwm signal generator. the counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (pwreg3, pwreg4) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer f/f4 is switched to the opposite state. the counter continues counting. the logic level output from the timer f/f4 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. the inttc4 interrupt is generated at this time. two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the tc3 pin. therefore, a maxi- mum frequency to be supplied is fc/2 4 hz in the normal1 or idle1 mode, and fs/2 4 to in the slow1/2 or sleep1/2 mode. since the initial value can be set to the timer f/f4 by tc4cr, positive and negative pulses can be generated. upon reset, the timer f/f4 is cleared to 0. (the logic level output from the pwm 4 pin is the opposite to the timer f/f4 logic level.) since pwreg4 and 3 in the pwm mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to pwreg4 and 3 can be changed while the timer is runni ng. the values set to pwreg4 and 3 during a run of the timer are shifted by the inttcj interrupt request and loaded into pwreg4 and 3. while the timer is stopped, the values are shifted i mmediately after the programming of pwreg4 and 3. set the lower byte (pwreg3) and upper byte (pwreg3) in this order to program pwreg4 and 3. (programming only the lower or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.) if executing the read instruction to pwreg4 and 3 during pwm output, the values set in the shift register is read, but not the values set in pwreg4 and 3. therefore, after writing to the pwreg4 and 3, reading data of pwreg4 and 3 is previous value until inttc4 is generated. for the pin used for pwm output, the output latch of the i/o port must be set to 1. note 1: in the pwm mode, program the timer register pwreg4 and 3 immediately after the inttc4 interrupt request is generated (normally in the inttc4 interrupt service routine.) if the programming of pwregj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of pulse different from the programmed value until the next inttc4 interrupt request is generated. note 2: when the timer is stopped during pwm output, the pwm 4 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. to change the output status, program tc4cr after the timer is stopped. do not program tc4cr upon stopping of the timer. example: fixing the pwm 4 pin to the high level when the timercounter is stopped in the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge to the tc3 pin. the timercounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to fo rm a 16-bit event counter. when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (ttreg3, ttreg4) value is detected after the timer is started by setting tc4cr to 1, an inttc4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. after being cleared, the up-counter rest arts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the tc3 pin. two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the tc3 pin. therefore, a maximum freque ncy to be supplied is fc/2 4 hz in the normal1 or idle1 mode, and fs/2 4 in the slow1/2 or sleep1/2 mode. program the lower by te (ttreg3), and upper byte (ttreg4) in this order in the timer register. (programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) note 1: note 2: note 3: in the event counter mode, fix tcjcr to 0. if not fixed, the pdoj, pwmj and ppgj pins may output pulses. in the event counter mode, do not change the ttregj setti ng while the timer is running. since ttregj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in ttregj is in effect imme- diately after the programming. therefore, if ttregj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. j = 3, 4
page 97 TMP86FH46ANG clr (tc4cr).3: stops the timer. clr (tc4cr).7 : sets the pwm 4 pin to the high level. note 3: to enter the stop mode, stop the timer and then enter the stop mode. if the stop mode is entered with- out stopping of the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is select ed as the source clock, a pulse is output from the pwm 4 pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the stop mode. table 9-7 16-bit pwm output mode source clock resolution repeated cycle normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz dv7ck = 0 dv7ck = 1 fc/2 11 fs/2 3 [hz] fs/2 3 [hz] 128 s244.14 s 8.39 s 16 s fc/2 7 fc/2 7 ?8 s ? 524.3 ms ? fc/2 5 fc/2 5 ?2 s ? 131.1 ms ? fc/2 3 fc/2 3 ? 500ns ? 32.8 ms ? fs fs fs 30.5 s30.5 s2 s 2 s fc/2 fc/2 ? 125 ns ? 8.2 ms ? fc fc ? 62.5 ns ? 4.1 ms ? example :generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 16.0 mhz) setting ports ldw (pwreg3), 07d0h : sets the pulse width. ld (tc3cr), 33h : sets the operating clock to fc/2 3 , and 16-bit pwm output mode (lower byte). ld (tc4cr), 056h : sets tff4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit pwm signal generation mode (upper byte). ld (tc4cr), 05eh : starts the timer.
page 98 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FH46ANG figure 9-7 16-bit pwm m ode timing chart (tc3 and tc4) 1 0 an an+1 ffff 0 an an+1 ffff 0 1 bm bm+1 ffff 0 bm cp b c 1 1 cp n a an ? ? ? internal source clock 16-bit shift register shift shift shift shift counter match detect match detect one cycle period match detect match detect an bm cp an m p tc4cr tc4cr pwreg3 (lower byte) timer f/f4 pwm 4 pin inttc4 interrupt request pwreg4 (upper byte) write to pwreg4 write to pwreg4 write to pwreg3 write to pwreg3
page 99 TMP86FH46ANG 9.3.8 16-bit programmable pulse generate (ppg) ou tput mode (tc3 and 4) this mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16- bits of resolution. the timer counter 3 and 4 are cascad- able to enter the 16-bit ppg mode. the counter counts up using the inte rnal clock or external clock. when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (pwreg3, pwreg4 ) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer f/f4 is switched to the opposite state. the counter continues counting. the logic level output from the timer f/f4 is switched to the opposite state again when a match betw een the up-counter and th e timer register (ttreg3, ttreg4) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. the inttc4 interrupt is generated at this time. since the initial value can be set to the timer f/f4 by tc4cr, positive and negative pulses can be generated. upon reset, the timer f/f4 is cleared to 0. (the logic level output from the ppg 4 pin is the opposite to the timer f/f4.) set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (ttreg3 ttreg4, pwreg3 pwreg4) (programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) for ppg output, set the output latch of the i/o port to 1. note 1: in the ppg mode, do not change the pwregi and ttregi settings while the timer is running. since pwregi and ttregi are not in the shift register c onfiguration in the ppg mode, the new values pro- grammed in pwregi and ttregi are in effect immediately after progra mming pwregi and ttregi. therefore, if pwregi and ttregi are changed whil e the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. note 2: when the timer is stopped during ppg output, the ppg 4 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. to change the output status, program tc4cr after the timer is stopped. do not change tc4cr upon stopping of the timer. example: fixing the ppg 4 pin to the high level when the timercounter is stopped clr (tc4cr).3: stops the timer clr (tc4cr).7: sets the ppg 4 pin to the high level note 3: i = 3, 4 two machine cycles are required for the high- or low- level pulse input to the tc3 pin. therefore, a maxi- mum frequency to be supplied is fc/2 4 hz in the normal1 or idle1 mode, and fc/2 4 to in the slow1/2 or sleep1/2 mode. example :generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 16.0 mhz) setting ports ldw (pwreg3), 07d0h : sets the pulse width. ldw (ttreg3), 8002h : sets the cycle period. ld (tc3cr), 33h : sets the operating clock to fc/2 3 , and16-bit ppg mode (lower byte). ld (tc4cr), 057h : sets tff4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit ppg mode (upper byte). ld (tc4cr), 05fh : starts the timer.
page 100 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FH46ANG figure 9-8 16-bit ppg mode timing chart (tc3 and tc40) 1 0 mn mn+1 qr-1 mn qr-1 1 mn mn+1 mn+1 0 qr 0 qr 1 0 internal source clock counter write of "0" match detect match detect match detect mn mn mn match detect match detect ? n m ? ? r q ? held at the level when the timer stops f/f clear tc4cr tc4cr pwreg3 (lower byte) timer f/f4 ppg 4 pin inttc4 interrupt request pwreg4 (upper byte) ttreg3 (lower byte) ttreg4 (upper byte)
page 101 TMP86FH46ANG 9.3.9 warm-up counter mode in this mode, the warm-up period time is obtained to assure oscillation stability when the system clocking is switched between the high-frequency and low-frequency. the timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timercouter. the warm-up counter mode has two types of mode; switching from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and vice-versa. note 1: in the warm-up counter mode, fi x tcicr to 0. if not fixed, the pdoi , pwmi and ppgi pins may output pulses. note 2: in the warm-up counter mode, only upper 8 bits of the timer register ttreg4 and 3 are used for match detection and lower 8 bits are not used. note 3: i = 3, 4 9.3.9.1 low-frequency warm-up counter mode (normal1 normal2 slow2 slow1) in this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the low-frequency clock fs to oscillation stability is obtained. before starting the timer, set syscr2 to 1 to oscillate the low-frequency clock. when a match between the up-counter and the timer regist er (ttreg4, 3) value is detected after the timer is started by setting tc4cr to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the inttc4 interrupt request. after stopping the timer in the inttc4 inte rrupt service routine, set syscr2 to 1 to switch the system clock fr om the high-frequency to low-frequenc y, and then clear of syscr2 to 0 to stop the high-frequency clock. table 9-8 setting time of low-frequen cy warm-up counter mode (fs = 32.768 khz) maximum time setting (ttreg4, 3 = 0100h) maximum time setting (ttreg4, 3 = ff00h) 7.81 ms 1.99 s example :after check ing low-frequency clock oscillation stability with tc4 and 3, switching to the slow1 mode set (syscr2).6 : syscr2 1 ld (tc3cr), 43h : sets tff3=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. ld (tc4cr), 05h : sets tff4=0, and warm-up counter mode. ld (ttreg3), 8000h : sets the warm-up time. (the warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) di : imf 0 set (eirh). 1 : enables the inttc4. ei : imf 1 set (tc4cr).3 : starts tc4 and 3. : : pinttc4: clr (tc4cr).3 : stops tc4 and 3. set (syscr2).5 : syscr2 1 (switches the system clock to the low-frequency clock.) clr (syscr2).7 : syscr2 0 (stops the high-frequency clock.) reti : : vinttc4: dw pinttc4 : inttc4 vector table
page 102 9. 8-bit timercounter (tc3, tc4) 9.1 configuration TMP86FH46ANG 9.3.9.2 high-frequency warm-up counter mode (slow1 slow2 normal2 normal1) in this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the high-frequency clock fc to the oscillation sta- bility is obtained. before starting the timer, set sy scr2 to 1 to oscillat e the high-frequency clock. when a match between the up-counter and the timer regist er (ttreg4, 3) value is detected after the timer is started by setting tc4cr to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the inttc4 interrupt request. after stopping the timer in the inttc4 inte rrupt service routine, clear syscr2 to 0 to switch the system clock from the low-frequency to high-frequency, and then syscr2 to 0 to stop the low-frequency clock. table 9-9 setting time in high-frequency warm-up counter mode minimum time (ttreg4, 3 = 0100h) maximum time (ttreg4, 3 = ff00h) 16 s 4.08 ms example :after check ing high-frequency clock oscillation stability with tc4 and 3, switching to the normal1 mode set (syscr2).7 : syscr2 1 ld (tc3cr), 63h : sets tff3=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. ld (tc4cr), 05h : sets tff4=0, and warm-up counter mode. ld (ttreg3), 0f800h : sets the warm-up time. (the warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) di : imf 0 set (eirh). 1 : enables the inttc4. ei : imf 1 set (tc4cr).3 : starts the tc4 and 3. : : pinttc4: clr (tc4cr).3 : stops the tc4 and 3. clr (syscr2).5 : syscr2 0 (switches the system clock to the high-frequency clock.) clr (syscr2).6 : syscr2 0 (stops the low-frequency clock.) reti : : vinttc4: dw pinttc4 : inttc4 vector table
page 103 TMP86FH46ANG 10. synchronous serial interface (sio) the serial interfaces connect to an external device via si, so, and sck pins. when these pins are used as serial interface, th e output latches for each port should be set to "1". 10.1 configuration figure 10-1 synchronous serial interface (sio) interrupt internal clock input to bus shift register on transmitter shift register on receiver (serial data output) control circuit shift clock internal data bus port (note) (serial data output) port (note) (serial data input) port (note) note: set the register of port correctly for the port assigned as serial interface pins. for details, see the description of the input/output port control register. msb/lsb selection so pin si pin siotdb siordb sck pin intsio siocr1 siosr
page 104 10. synchronous serial interface (sio) 10.2 control TMP86FH46ANG 10.2 control the sio is controlled using the serial interface control regi ster (siocr1). the operating status of the serial inter- face can be inspected by readin g the status register (siocr1). note 1: when siocr1 is set to ?1?, siocr1, sios r register, siordb register and siotdb register are initial- ized. note 2: transfer mode, direction of transfer and serial clock must be select during the transfer is stopping (when siosr "0"). note 3: fc: high-frequency clock [hz], fs : low-frequency clock [hz], *: don?t care serial interface control register siocr1 (0026h) 76543210 sios sioinh siom siodir sck (initial value: 0000 0000) sios specify start/stop of transfer 0: stop 1: start r/w sioinh forcibly stops transfer (note 1) 0: ? 1: forcibly stop (automatically cleared to "0" after stopping) siom selects transfer mode 00: transmit mode 01: receive mode 10: transmit/receive mode 11: reserved siodir selects direction of transfer 0: msb (transfer beginning with bit7) 1: lsb (transfer beginning with bit0) sck selects serial clock normal1/2 or idle1/2 modes slow/sleep mode tbtcr = "0" tbtcr = "1" 000 fc/2 12 fs/2 4 fs/2 4 001 fc/2 8 fc/2 8 reserved 010 fc/2 7 fc/2 7 reserved 011 fc/2 6 fc/2 6 reserved 100 fc/2 5 fc/2 5 reserved 101 fc/2 4 fc/2 4 reserved 110 fc/2 3 fc/2 3 reserved 111 external clock (input from sck pin)
page 105 TMP86FH46ANG note 1: the operation error flag (txerr and rxerr) are not autom atically cleared by stopping tr ansfer with siocr1 "0". therefore, set these bits to "0" for cleari ng these error flag. or set siocr1 to "1". note 2: *: don't care note 1: siotdb is write only register. a bit manipulation should not be performed on t he transmit buffer register using a read- modify-write instruction. note 2: the siotdb should be written after checking siosr "1". when siosr is "0", the writing data can't be transferred to siotdb even if write instruction is executed to siotdb note 3: *: don't care serial interface status register siosr (0027h) 76543210 siof sef txf rxf txerr rxerr (initial value: 0010 00**) siof serial transfer operation status monitor 0: transfer finished 1: transfer in progress read only sef number of clocks monitor 0: 8 clocks 1: 1 to 7 clocks txf transmit buffer empty flag 0: data exists in transmit buffer 1: no data exists in transmit buffer rxf receive buffer full flag 0: no data exists in receive buffer 1: data exists in receive buffer txerr transfer operation error flag read 0: ? (no error exist) 1: transmit buffer under run occurs in an external clock mode write 0: clear the flag 1: ? (a write of "1" to this bit is ignored) r/w rxerr receive operation error flag read 0: ? (no error exist) 1: receive buffer over run occurs in an external clock mode write 0: clear the flag 1: ? (a write of "1" to this bit is ignored) receive buffer register siordb (0028h) 76543210read only (initial value: 0000 0000) transmit buffer register siotdb (0028h) 76543210write only (initial value: **** ****)
page 106 10. synchronous serial interface (sio) 10.3 function TMP86FH46ANG 10.3 function 10.3.1 serial clock 10.3.1.1 clock source the serial clock can be selected by using siocr1. when the serial clock is changed, the writing instruction to siocr1 should be executed wh ile the transfer is st opped (when siosr ?0?) (1) internal clock setting the siocr1 to other than ?111b? outputs the clock (shown in " table 10-1 serial clock rate (fc = 16 mhz, fs = 32.768khz) ") as serial clock outputs from sck pin. at the before beginning or finishing of a transfer, sck pin is kept in high level. when writing (in the transmit mode) or reading (i n the receive mode) data can not follow the serial clock rate, an automatic-wait function is executed to stop the serial clock au tomatically and hold the next shift operation until reading or writing is completed (shown in " figure 10-2 automatic-wait function (example of transmit mode) "). the maximum time from releasing the automatic-wait function by reading or writing a data is 1 cycle of th e selected serial clock until the serial clock comes out from sck pin. figure 10-2 automatic-wait f unction (example of transmit mode) table 10-1 serial clock rate (fc = 16 mhz, fs = 32.768khz) normal1/2, idle1/2 mode slow1/2, sleep1/2 mode tbtcr = "0" tbtcr = "1" serial clock baud rate sck serial clock baud rate serial clock baud rate 000 fc/2 12 3.906 kbps fs/2 4 2048 bps fs/2 4 2048 bps 001 fc/2 8 62.5 kbps fc/2 8 62.5 kbps reserved ? 010 fc/2 7 125 kbps fc/2 7 125 kbps reserved ? 011 fc/2 6 250 kbps fc/2 6 250 kbps reserved ? 100 fc/2 5 500 kbps fc/2 5 500 kbps reserved ? 101 fc/2 4 1.00 mbps fc/2 4 1.00 mbps reserved ? 110 fc/2 3 2.00 mbps fc/2 3 2.00 mbps reserved ab a0 automatically wait a1 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 b2 b1 b0 siocr1 so pin siotdb automatic wait is rel eased by writing siotdb sck pin output
page 107 TMP86FH46ANG (2) external clock when an external clock is selected by set ting siocr1 to ?111b?, the clock via the sck pin from an external source is used as the serial clock. to ensure shift operation, the se rial clock pulse width must be 4/fc or more for both ?h? and ?l? levels. figure 10-3 external clock 10.3.1.2 shift edge the leading edge is used to transmit data, an d the trailing edge is used to receive data. (1) leading edge shift data is shifted on the leading edge of the serial clock (falling edge of the sck pin input/output). (2) trailing edge shift data is shifted on the trailing edge of the serial clock (rising edge of the sck pin input/output). figure 10-4 shift edge t sckl t sckh t sckl, t sckh > 4/fc sck pin 7******* ******** bit7 shift out ***01234 **012345 *0123456 bit5 bit6 bit5 bit6 bit7 67****** 567***** (a) leading edge shift (example of msb transfer) (b) trailing edge shift (example of msb transfer) 01234567 ****0123 *****012 ******01 *******0 ******** bit4 4567**** 34567*** 234567** 1234567* 01234567 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 siocr1 sck pin shift register so pin shift register sck pin si pin siocr1
page 108 10. synchronous serial interface (sio) 10.3 function TMP86FH46ANG 10.3.2 transfer bit direction transfer data direction can be selected by using sio cr1. the transfer da ta direction can't be set individually for transm it and receive operations. when the data direction is changed, the writing inst ruction to siocr1 should be executed while the transfer is stopped (when siocr1= ?0?) figure 10-5 transfer bit dire ction (example of transmit mode) 10.3.2.1 transmit mode (1) msb transmit mode msb transmit mode is selected by setting sio cr1 to ?0?, in which case the data is transferred sequentially beginning with the most significant bit (bit7). (2) lsb transmit mode lsb transmit mode is selected by setting sio cr1 to ?1?, in which case the data is transferred sequentially beginning with the least significant bit (bit0). 10.3.2.2 receive mode (1) msb receive mode msb receive mode is selected by setting siocr1 to ?0 ?, in which case the data is received sequentially beginning with the most significant bit (bit7). (b) lsb transfer a0 a a1 a2 (a) msb transfer a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 shift out a7 a a6 a5 a4 a3 a2 a1 a0 shift out siocr1 sck pin siotdb so pin siocr1 sck pin siotdb so pin
page 109 TMP86FH46ANG (2) lsb receive mode lsb receive mode is selected by setting sio cr1 to ?1?, in which case the data is received sequentially beginning with the least significant bit (bit0). 10.3.2.3 transmit/receive mode (1) msb transmit/receive mode msb transmit/receive m ode are selected by setting siocr1 to ?0? in which case the data is transferred sequentially be ginning with the most significant bit (bit7) and the data is received sequentially beginning with the most significant (bit7). (2) lsb transmit/receive mode lsb transmit/receive mode are se lected by setting sio cr1 to ?1?, in which case the data is transferred sequentially be ginning with the least significant bit (bit0) and the data is received sequentially beginning with the least significant (bit0). 10.3.3 transfer modes transmit, receive and transmit/receive mode are selected by using siocr1. 10.3.3.1 transmit mode transmit mode is selected by writing ?00b? to siocr1. (1) starting the transmit operation transmit mode is selected by se tting ?00b? to siocr1. seri al clock is selected by using siocr1. transfer direction is selected by using siocr1. when a transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register (siotdb) , siosr is cleared to ?0?. after siocr1 is set to ?1?, siosr is set synchronously to ?1? the falling edge of sck pin. the data is transferred sequential ly starting from so pin with the direction of the bit specified by siocr1, synchronizing with the sck pin's falling edge. siosr is kept in high level, be tween the first clock falling edge of sck pin and eighth clock falling edge. siosr is set to ?1? at the rising edge of pin after the data written to the siotdb is trans- ferred to shift register, then th e intsio interrupt request is generated, synchronizing with the next falling edge on sck pin. note 1: in internal clock operation, when siocr1 is set to "1", transfer mode does not start with- out writing a transmit data to the transmit buffer register (siotdb). note 2: in internal clock operation, when the siocr1 is set to "1", siotdb is transferred to shift register after maximum 1-cycle of serial cloc k frequency, then a serial clock is output from sck pin. note 3: in external clock operation, when the falling edge is input from sck pin after siocr1 is set to "1", siotdb is transferr ed to shift register immediately.
page 110 10. synchronous serial interface (sio) 10.3 function TMP86FH46ANG (2) during the transmit operation when data is written to siotdb , siosr is cleared to ?0?. in internal clock operation, in cas e a next transmit data is not wr itten to siotdb, the serial clock stops to ?h? level by an automatic-wait function when all of the bit set in the siotdb has been transmitted. automatic-wait function is released by writing a transmit data to siotdb. then, trans- mit operation is restarted after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock. when the next data is written to the siotdb before termination of previous 8-bit data with siosr ?1?, the next data is continuously transferred after transm ission of previous data. in external clock operation, after siosr is set to ?1?, the transmit data must be written to siotdb before the shift operation of the next data begins. if the transmit data is not written to siotdb, tr ansmit error occurs immediately after shift opera- tion is started. then, intsio interrupt request is generated after siosr is set to ?1?. (3) stopping the transmit operation there are two ways for st opping transmits operation. ? the way of clearing siocr1. when siocr1 is cleared to ?0?, transmit operat ion is stopped after all transfer of the data is finished. when transm it operation is finished, sios r is cleared to ?0? and so pin is kept in high level. in external clock operation, siocr1 must be cleared to ?0? before siosr is set to ?1? by beginning next transfer. ? the way of setting siocr1. transmit operation is stopped immediately after siocr1 is set to ?1?. in this case, siocr1, siosr register, siordb register and siotdb register are initial- ized. figure 10-6 example of inte rnal clock and msb transmit mode a6 a5 a4 a3 a2 a1 a0 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 c7 a7 b0 c6 c5 c4 c3 c2 c1 c0 a b c automatic wait start shift operation start shift operation start shift operation writing transmit data b writing transmit data a writing transmit data c clearing sios siocr1 siosr siosr sck pin outout so pin siosr siotdb intsio interrupt request
page 111 TMP86FH46ANG figure 10-7 exaple of exte rnal clock and m sb transmit mode figure 10-8 hold time of the end of transmit mode (4) transmit error processing transmit errors occur on the following situation. ? shift operation starts before writing next transm it data to siotdb in external clock opera- tion. if transmit errors occur during transmit ope ration, siosr is set to ?1? immedi- ately after starting shift operation. synchronizin g with the next serial clock falling edge, intsio interrupt request is generated. if shift operation starts before writing data to siotdb after siocr1 is set to ?1?, siosr is set to ?1? im mediately after shift operation is started and then intsio interrupt request is generated. sio pin is kept in high level when siosr is set to ?1?. when transmit error occurs, transmit operation must be forcibly stop by writing siocr1 to ?1?. in this case, siocr1, siosr register, sior db register and siotdb register are ini- tialized. writing transmit data c writing transmit data b writing transmit data a c b a7 a6 a a5 a4 a3 a2 a1 a0 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 c7 c6 c5 c4 c3 c2 c1 c0 start shift operation start shift operation start shift operation clearing sios writing transmit data siocr1 siosr siosr sck pin so pin siosr intsio interrupt request siotdb 4/fc 8/fc t sodh t sodh < < sck pin siosr so pin
page 112 10. synchronous serial interface (sio) 10.3 function TMP86FH46ANG figure 10-9 example of tr ansmit error processingme 10.3.3.2 receive mode the receive mode is selected by writing ?01b? to siocr. (1) starting the receive operation receive mode is selected by setting ?01? to si ocr1. serial clock is selected by using siocr1. transfer direction is selected by using siocr1. after siocr1 is set to ?1?, siosr is set synchronously to ?1? the falling edge of sck pin. synchronizing with the sck pin's rising edge, the data is recei ved sequentially from si pin with the direction of the bit specified by sbidir. siosr is kept in high level, be tween the first clock falling edge of sck pin and eighth clock falling edge. when 8-bit data is received, the data is transfer red to siordb from shift register. intsio inter- rupt request is generated and siosr is set to ?1? note: in internal clock operation, when the siocr1 is set to "1", the serial clock is generated from sck pin after maximum 1-cycl e of serial clock frequency. (2) during the receive operation the siosr is cleared to ?0? by reading a data from siordb. in the internal clock operation, the serial clock stops to ?h? level by an automatic-wait function when the all of the 8-bit data ha s been received. automatic-wait fu nction is released by reading a received data from siordb. then, receive operation is restarted after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock. in external clock operation, after siosr is set to ?1?, the received data must be read from siordb, before the next data shift-in operation is finished. writing transmit data b writing transmit data a unknown b a7 a6 a a5 a4 a3 a2 a1 a0 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 start shift operation start shift operation start shift operation siocr1 siosr siosr sck pin so pin siosr siosr intsio interrupt request siotdb siocr1
page 113 TMP86FH46ANG if received data is not read ou t from siordb receive error occu rs immediately after shift opera- tion is finished. then intsio interrupt request is generated after siosr is set to ?1?. (3) stopping the receive operation there are two ways for stopping the receive operation. ? the way of clearing siocr1. when siocr1 is cleared to ?0?, receive operation is sto pped after all of the data is finished to receive. when recei ve operation is finished, si osr is cleared to ?0?. in external clock operation, siocr1 must be cleared to ?0? before siosr is set to ?1? by starting the next shift operation. ? the way of setting siocr1. receive operation is stopped imme diately after siocr1 is set to ?1?. in this case, siocr1, siosr register, siordb regist er and siotdb register are initialized. figure 10-10 example of inte rnal clock and msb receive mode a6 a5 a4 a3 a2 a1 a0 a7 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 c7 b0 c6 c5 c4 c3 c2 c1 c0 b a c automatic wait start shift operation start shift operation start shift operation writing transmit data a writing transmit data b clearing sios writing transmit data c siocr1 siosr siosr sck pin si pin siosr intsio interrupt request siordb
page 114 10. synchronous serial interface (sio) 10.3 function TMP86FH46ANG figure 10-11 example of exter nal clock and msb receive mode (4) receive error processing receive errors occur on the followin g situation. to protect siordb and the shift register contents, the received data is ignored wh ile the siosr is ?1?. ? shift operation is finished before reading ou t received data from siordb at siosr is ?1? in an external clock operation. if receive error occurs, set the siocr1 to ?0? for reading the data that received immediately before error occurence. and read th e data from siordb. data in shift register (at errors occur) can be read by reading the siordb again. when siosr is cleared to ?0? after reading the r eceived data, siosr is cleared to ?0?. after clearing siocr1 to ?0?, wh en 8-bit serial clock is input to sck pin, receive operation is stopped. to restar t the receive operation, confir m that siosr is cleared to ?0?. if the receive error occurs, se t the siocr1 to ?1? for stopping the receive opera- tion immediately. in this case, siocr1, siosr register, siordb register and siotdb register are initialized. writing transmit data c writing transmit data b writing transmit data a c b a7 a6 a a5 a4 a3 a2 a1 a0 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 c7 c6 c5 c4 c3 c2 c1 c0 start shift operation start shift operation start shift operation clearing sios reading received data siocr1 siosr siosr sck pin si pin siosr intsio interrupt request siordb
page 115 TMP86FH46ANG figure 10-12 example of receive error processing note: if receive error is not corrected, an interrupt request does not generate after the error occurs. 10.3.3.3 transmit/receive mode the transmit/receive mode are select ed by writing ?10? to siocr1. (1) starting the transmit/receive operation transmit/receive mode is selected by writing ?10b? to siocr1. serial clock is selected by using siocr1. transfer directi on is selected by using siocr1. when a transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register (siotdb) , siosr is cleared to ?0?. after siocr1 is set to ?1?, siosr is set synchr onously to the falling edge of sck pin. the data is transferred sequential ly starting from so pin with the direction of the bit specified by siocr1, synchronizing with the sck pin's falling edge. and receiving operation also starts with the direction of the bit specified by siocr1, synchronizing with the sck pin's rising edge. siosr is kept in high level betw een the first clock falling edge of sck pin and eighth clock falling edge. siosr is set to ?1 ? at the rising edge of sck pin after the data written to the siotdb is transferred to shift register. when 8-bit data has been received, the receive d data is transferred to siordb from shift register, then the intsio interrupt request occurs, synchronizing with setting siosr to ?1?. note 1: in internal clock operation, when the siocr1 is set to "1", siotdb is transferred to shift register after maximum 1-cycle of serial cloc k frequency, then a serial clock is output from sck pin. note 2: in external clock operation, when the falling edge is input from sck pin after siocr1 is set to "1", siotdb is transferred to shift regist er immediately. when the rising edge is input from sck pin, receive operation also starts. writing transmit data b writing transmit data a b a7 a6 a a5 a4 a3 a2 a1 a0 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 c7 c6 c5 c4 c3 c2 c1 c0 start shift operation start shift operation start shift operation write a "0" after reading the received data when a receive error occurs. siocr1 siosr sck pin siosr intsio interrupt request siordb si pin siosr siosr
page 116 10. synchronous serial interface (sio) 10.3 function TMP86FH46ANG (2) during the transmit/receive operation when data is written to siotdb , siosr is cleared to ?0? and when a data is read from siordb, siosr is cleared to ?0?. in internal clock operation, in case of the condition described below, the serial clock stops to ?h? level by an automatic-wait function when all of the bit set in the data has been transmitted. ? next transmit data is not wr itten to siotdb after readi ng a received data from siordb. ? received data is not read from siordb afte r writing a next transmit data to siotdb. ? neither siotdb nor siordb is accessed after transmission. the automatic wait function is released by writing the next transmit data to siotdb after reading the received data from siordb, or reading the re ceived data from siordb after writing the next data to siotdb. then, transmit/receive operation is restarte d after maximum 1 cycle of serial clock. in external clock operation, reading the received data from siordb and writing the next data to siotdb must be finished before the shift operation of the next data begins. if the transmit data is not written to siotdb afte r siosr is set to ?1 ?, transmit error occurs immediately after shift operation is started. when the transmit error occurred, siosr is set to ?1?. if received data is not read ou t from siordb before next shift operation starts after setting siosr to ?1?, receive erro r occurs immediately after shift operation is finished. when the receive error has occurred, si osr is set to ?1?. (3) stopping the transmit/receive operation there are two ways for stopping the transmit/receive operation. ? the way of clearing siocr1. when siocr1 is cleared to ?0?, transm it/receive operation is stopped after all trans- fer of the data is finished. when transmi t/receive operation is finished, siosr is cleared to ?0? and so pin is kept in high level. in external clock operation, siocr1 must be cleared to ?0? before siosr is set to ?1? by beginning next transfer. ? the way of setting siocr1. transmit/receive operation is st opped immediately after siocr1 is set to ?1?. in this case, siocr1, siosr register, sior db register and siotdb register are ini- tialized.
page 117 TMP86FH46ANG figure 10-13 example of internal clock and msb transmit/receive mode a6 a5 a4 a3 a2 a1 a0 a7 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 c7 b0 c6 c5 c4 c3 c2 c1 c0 c a b automatic wait automatic wait start shift operation start shift operation start shift operation writing transmit data a writing transmit data b d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0 d7 e7 e6 e5 e4 e3 e2 e1 f7 e0 f6 f5 f4 f3 f2 f1 f0 clearing sios writing transmit data c e d f reading received data d reading received data e reading received data f siocr1 siosr siosr sck pin output so pin si pin intsio interrupt request siosr siosr siordb siotdb
page 118 10. synchronous serial interface (sio) 10.3 function TMP86FH46ANG figure 10-14 example of external clock and m sb transmit/receive mode (4) transmit/receive error processing transmit/receive errors occur on the following situatio n. corrective action is different, which errors occur tran smits or receives. (a) transmit errors transmit errors occur on the following situation. ? shift operation starts before writing next tr ansmit data to siotdb in external clock op- eration. if transmit errors occur duri ng transmit operation, siosr is set to ?1? imme- diately after starting shift operation. and intsio interrupt request is generated after all of the 8-bit data has been received. if shift operation starts before writing data to siotdb after siocr1 is set to ?1?, siosr is set immediately afte r starting shift operation. and intsio in- terrupt request is generated after all of the 8-bit data has been received. so pin is kept in high level when siosr is set to ?1?. when transmit error occurs, transmit operation must be forcibly stop by writing siocr1 to ?1? after the received data is read from sior db. in this case, siocr1, siosr reg- ister, siordb register and si otdb register are initialized. writing transmit data c writing transmit data b writing transmit data a c b a7 a6 a a5 a4 a3 a2 a1 a0 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 c7 c6 c5 c4 c3 c2 c1 c0 d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0 e7 e6 e5 e4 e3 e2 e1 e0 f7 f6 f5 f4 f3 f2 f1 f0 start shift operation start shift operation start shift operation clearing sios reading received data reading received data f reading received data e reading received data d f e d writing transmit data siocr1 siosr siosr sck pin output so pin si pin intsio interrupt request siosr siosr siordb siotdb
page 119 TMP86FH46ANG figure 10-15 example of transmit/receive (transmit) error processing (b) receive errors receive errors occur on the following situatio n. to protect siordb and the shift register contents, the received data is igno red while the siosr is ?1?. ? shift operation is finished before read ing out received data from siordb at siosr is ?1? in an external clock operation. if receive error occurs, set th e siocr1 to ?0? for r eading the data that received immediately before error occurence. and read the data from siordb. data in shift reg- ister (at errors occur) can be r ead by reading the siordb again. when siosr is cleared to ?0? af ter reading the received data, siosr is cleared to ?0?. after clearing siocr1 to ?0?, when 8-bit serial clock is input to sck pin, re- ceive operation is stopped. to restart the r eceive operation, conf irm that siosr is cleared to ?0?. if the received error occurs, set the siocr1 to ?1? for stopping the receive operation immediately. in this case, siocr1 , siosr register, siordb register and siotdb register are initialized. writing transmit data b writing transmit data a unknown b a7 a6 a a5 a4 a3 a2 a1 a0 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0 e7 e6 e5 e4 e3 e2 e1 e0 f7 f6 f5 f4 f3 f2 f1 f0 start shift operation start shift operation start shift operation reading received data f reading received data e reading received data d f e d siocr1 siosr siosr sck pin output so pin si pin intsio interrupt request siosr siosr siordb siotdb siosr siocr1
page 120 10. synchronous serial interface (sio) 10.3 function TMP86FH46ANG figure 10-16 example of transmit/ receive (receive) error processing note: if receive error is not corrected, an interrupt request does not generate after the error occurs. figure 10-17 hold ti me of the end of transmit/receive mode writing transmit data c writing transmit data b writing transmit data a unknown c b a7 a6 a a5 a4 a3 a2 a1 a0 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 c7 c6 c5 c4 c3 d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0 e7 e6 e5 e4 e3 e2 e1 e0 f7 f6 f5 f4 f3 f2 f1 f0 start shift operation start shift operation start shift operation reading received data e reading received data d ooh e d siocr1 siosr siosr sck pin output so pin si pin intsio interrupt request siosr siosr siordb siotdb siocr1 siosr 4/fc 8/fc t sodh t sodh < < sck pin siosr so pin
page 121 TMP86FH46ANG 11. asynchronous serial interface (uart ) 11.1 configuration figure 11-1 uart (asynch ronous serial interface) counter y a b c s s a b c d y e f g h uart status register uart control register 2 uart control register 1 transmit data buffer receive data buffer fc/13 fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416 fc/96 stop bit parity bit fc/2 6 fc/2 7 fc/2 8 baud rate generator transmit/receive clock 2 4 3 2 2 2 noise rejection circuit m p x transmit control circuit shift register shift register receive control circuit mpx: multiplexer uartcr1 tdbuf rdbuf inttxd intrxd uartsr uartcr2 rxd txd inttc3
page 122 11. asynchronous serial interface (uart ) 11.2 control TMP86FH46ANG 11.2 control uart is controlled by the uart control registers (uartcr1, uartcr2). the operating status can be moni- tored using the uart status register (uartsr). note 1: when operations are disabled by se tting txe and rxe bit to ?0?, the setting be comes valid when data transmit or receive complete. when the transmit data is stored in the transmit data buf fer, the data are not transmitted. even if data transmit is enabled, until new data are written to the transmit data buffer, the current data are not transmitted. note 2: the transmit clock and the parity are common to transmit and receive. note 3: uartcr1 and uartcr1 should be set to ?0? before uartcr1 is changed. note: when uartcr2 = ?01?, pulses longer than 96/fc [s] are always regarded as signals; when uartcr2 = ?10?, longer than 192/fc [s]; and when uart cr2 = ?11?, longer than 384/fc [s]. uart control register1 uartcr1 (0020h) 76543210 txe rxe stbt even pe brg (initial value: 0000 0000) txe transfer operation 0: 1: disable enable write only rxe receive operation 0: 1: disable enable stbt transmit stop bit length 0: 1: 1 bit 2 bits even even-numbered parity 0: 1: odd-numbered parity even-numbered parity pe parity addition 0: 1: no parity parity brg transmit clock select 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: fc/13 [hz] fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416 tc3 ( input inttc3) fc/96 uart control register2 uartcr2 (0021h) 7654321 0 rxdnc stopbr (initial value: **** *000) rxdnc selection of rxd input noise rejectio time 00: 01: 10: 11: no noise rejection (hysteresis input) rejects pulses shorter than 31/fc [s] as noise rejects pulses shorter than 63/fc [s] as noise rejects pulses shorter than 127/fc [s] as noise write only stopbr receive stop bit length 0: 1: 1 bit 2 bits
page 123 TMP86FH46ANG note: when an inttxd is generated, tbep flag is set to "1" automatically. uart status register uartsr (0020h) 76543210 perr ferr oerr rbfl tend tbep (initial value: 0000 11**) perr parity error flag 0: 1: no parity error parity error read only ferr framing error flag 0: 1: no framing error framing error oerr overrun error flag 0: 1: no overrun error overrun error rbfl receive data buffer full flag 0: 1: receive data buffer empty receive data buffer full tend transmit end flag 0: 1: on transmitting transmit end tbep transmit data buffer empty flag 0: 1: transmit data buffer full (transmit data writing is finished) transmit data buffer empty uart receive data buffer rdbuf (0022h) 76543210read only (initial value: 0000 0000) uart transmit data buffer tdbuf (0022h) 76543210write only (initial value: 0000 0000)
page 124 11. asynchronous serial interface (uart ) 11.3 transfer data format TMP86FH46ANG 11.3 transfer data format in uart, an one-bit start bit (low level), stop bit (bit length selectable at high level, by uartcr1), and parity (select parity in uartcr1

; even- or odd-number ed parity by uartcr1) are added to the transfer data. the transfer data formats are shown as follows. figure 11-2 transfer data format figure 11-3 caution on ch anging transfer data format note: in order to switch the transfer data format, perform transmit operations in the above figure 11-3 sequence except for the initial setting. start bit 0 bit 1 bit 6 bit 7 stop 1 start bit 0 bit 1 bit 6 bit 7 stop 1 stop 2 start bit 0 bit 1 bit 6 bit 7 parity stop 1 start bit 0 bit 1 bit 6 bit 7 parity stop 1 stop 2 pe 0 0 1 1 stbt frame length 0 1 123 89101112 0 1 without parity / 1 stop bit with parity / 1 stop bit without parity / 2 stop bit with parity / 2 stop bit
page 125 TMP86FH46ANG 11.4 transfer rate the baud rate of uart is set of uartcr1. th e example of the baud rate are shown as follows. when tc3 is used as the uart transfer rate (when uartcr1 = ?110?), the tr ansfer clock and transfer rate are determined as follows: transfer clock [hz] = tc3 source clock [hz] / ttreg3 setting value transfer rate [baud] = transfer clock [hz] / 16 11.5 data sampling method the uart receiver keeps sampling input using the cloc k selected by uartcr1 until a start bit is detected in rxd pin input. rt clock star ts detecting ?l? level of the rxd pin. once a start bit is detected, the start bit, data bits, stop bi t(s), and parity bit are sampled at three times of rt7, rt8, and rt9 during one receiver clock interval (rt clock). (rt0 is the position where the bit supposedly starts.) bit is determined according to majority rule (the data are the same twice or more out of three samplings). figure 11-4 data sampling method table 11-1 transfer rate (example) brg source clock 16 mhz 8 mhz 4 mhz 000 76800 [baud] 38400 [baud] 19200 [baud] 001 38400 19200 9600 010 19200 9600 4800 011 9600 4800 2400 100 4800 2400 1200 101 2400 1200 600 rt0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112 1314 15  01234567891011 bit 0 start bit bit 0 start bit (a) without noise rejection circuit rt clock internal receive data rt0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112 1314 15  01234567891011 bit 0 start bit bit 0 start bit rt clock internal receive data (b) with noise rejection circuit rxd pin rxd pin
page 126 11. asynchronous serial interface (uart ) 11.6 stop bit length TMP86FH46ANG 11.6 stop bit length select a transmit stop bit length (1 bit or 2 bits) by uartcr1. 11.7 parity set parity / no parity by uartcr1 and set parity type (odd- or even-numbered) by uartcr1. 11.8 transmit/receive operation 11.8.1 data transmit operation set uartcr1 to ?1?. read uartsr to check ua rtsr = ?1?, then write data in tdbuf (transmit data buffer). writing data in tdbuf zero-cl ears uartsr, transfers the data to the transmit shift register and the data are sequenti ally output from the txd pin. the data output include a one-bit start bit, stop bits whose number is specified in uartcr1 and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. select the data transfer baud rate using uartcr1. when data transmit st arts, transmit buffer empty flag uartsr is set to ?1? a nd an inttxd interrupt is generated. while uartcr1 = ?0? and from when ?1? is written to uartcr1 to when send data are written to tdbuf, the txd pin is fixed at high level. when transmitting data, first read uartsr, then write data in tdbuf. otherwise, uartsr is not zero-cleared and transm it does not start. 11.8.2 data receive operation set uartcr1 to ?1?. when data are received vi a the rxd pin, the receive data are transferred to rdbuf (receive data buffer). at this time, the data transmitted includes a start bit and stop bit(s) and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. when stop bit(s) are received, data only are extracted and transferred to rdbuf (receive data buffer). then the receive buffer full flag ua rtsr is set and an intrxd interrupt is generated. select the data transfer baud rate using uartcr1. if an overrun error (oerr) occurs when data are received, the da ta are not transferre d to rdbuf (receive data buffer) but discarded; data in the rdbuf are not affected. note:when a receive operation is disabled by setting ua rtcr1 bit to ?0?, the setting becomes valid when data receive is completed. however, if a framing error occurs in data receive, the receive-disabling setting may not become valid. if a framing error occurs , be sure to perform a re-receive operation.
page 127 TMP86FH46ANG 11.9 status flag 11.9.1 parity error when parity determined using the receive data bits diff ers from the received parity bit, the parity error flag uartsr is set to ?1?. the uartsr is cl eared to ?0? when the rdbuf is read after read- ing the uartsr. figure 11-5 generation of parity error 11.9.2 framing error when ?0? is sampled as the stop bit in the receive data, framing error flag uartsr is set to ?1?. the uartsr is cleared to ?0? when the rdbuf is r ead after reading the uartsr. figure 11-6 generati on of framing error 11.9.3 overrun error when all bits in the next data are received while unread data are still in rdbuf, overrun error flag uartsr is set to ?1?. in this case, the receive data is discarded; data in rdbuf are not affected. the uartsr is cleared to ?0? when the rdbuf is read af ter reading the uartsr. parity stop shift register pxxxx0 * 1pxxxx0 xxxx0 ** rxd pin uartsr intrxd interrupt after reading uartsr then rdbuf clears perr. final bit stop shift register xxxx0 * 0xxxx0 xxx0 ** rxd pin uartsr intrxd interrupt after reading uartsr then rdbuf clears ferr.
page 128 11. asynchronous serial interface (uart ) 11.9 status flag TMP86FH46ANG figure 11-7 generati on of overrun error note:receive operations are di sabled until the overrun error flag uartsr is cleared. 11.9.4 receive data buffer full loading the received data in rdbuf sets receive data buffer full flag uartsr to "1". the uartsr is cleared to ?0? when the rdbuf is read after reading the uartsr. figure 11-8 generation of receive data buffer full note:if the overrun error flag uartsr is set during the period between reading the uartsr and reading the rdbuf, it cannot be cleared by only reading the rdbuf. therefore, after reading the rdbuf, read the uartsr again to check whether or not the overrun er ror flag which should have been cleared still remains set. 11.9.5 transmit data buffer empty when no data is in the transmit buffer tdbuf, uartsr is set to ?1?, that is, when data in tdbuf are transferred to the transmit shif t register and data transmit star ts, transmit data buffer empty flag uartsr is set to ?1?. the uartsr is cleared to ?0? when the tdbuf is written after reading the uartsr. final bit stop shift register xxxx0 * 1xxxx0 yyyy xxx0 ** rxd pin uartsr intrxd interrupt after reading uartsr then rdbuf clears oerr. rdbuf uartsr final bit stop shift register xxxx0 * 1xxxx0 xxxx yyyy xxx0 ** rxd pin uartsr intrxd interrupt rdbuf after reading uartsr then rdbuf clears rbfl.
page 129 TMP86FH46ANG figure 11-9 generation of transmit data buffer empty 11.9.6 transmit end flag when data are transmitted and no data is in tdbuf (uartsr = ?1?), transmit end flag uartsr is set to ?1?. the uartsr is cleared to ?0? when the data transmit is stated after writing the tdbuf. figure 11-10 generation of transmit end flag and transmit data buffer empty shift register data write data write zzzz xxxx yyyy start bit 0 final bit stop 1xxxx0 ***** 1 * 1xxxx **** 1x ***** 1 1yyyy0 tdbuf txd pin uartsr inttxd interrupt after reading uartsr writing tdbuf clears tbep. shift register * 1yyyy *** 1 xx **** 1 x ***** 1 stop start 1yyyy0 bit 0 txd pin uartsr uartsr inttxd interrupt data write for tdbuf
page 130 11. asynchronous serial interface (uart ) 11.9 status flag TMP86FH46ANG
page 131 TMP86FH46ANG 12. 10-bit ad converter (adc) the TMP86FH46ANG have a 10-bit successive approximation type ad converter. 12.1 configuration the circuit configuration of the 10-bit ad converter is shown in figure 12-1. it consists of control register adccr1 and adccr2 , converted value register adcdr1 and adcdr2, a da converter, a sample-hold circuit, a compar ator, and a successive comparison circuit. note: before using ad converter, set appropriate value to i/o port register conbining a analog input port. for details, see the sec- tion on "i/o ports". figure 12-1 10-bit ad converter 2 4 10 8 ainds adrs r/2 r/2 r ack amd irefon ad conversion result register 1, 2 ad converter control register 1, 2 adbf eocf intadc sain n successive approximate circuit adccr2 adcdr1 adcdr2 adccr1  sample hold circuit a s en shift clock da converter analog input multiplexer y reference voltage analog comparator 2 3 control circuit avss varef avdd ain0 ain7
page 132 12. 10-bit ad converter (adc) 12.2 register configuration TMP86FH46ANG 12.2 register configuration the ad converter consists of the following four registers: 1. ad converter control register 1 (adccr1) this register selects the analog channels and operatio n mode (software start or repeat) in which to per- form ad conversion and controls the ad converter as it starts operating. 2. ad converter control register 2 (adccr2) this register selects the ad conversion time and co ntrols the connection of the da converter (ladder resistor network). 3. ad converted value register 1 (adcdr1) this register used to store the digital value fter being converted by the ad converter. 4. ad converted value register 2 (adcdr2) this register monitors the oper ating status of the ad converter. note 1: select analog input channel during ad converter stops (adcdr2 = "0"). note 2: when the analog input channel is all use dis abling, the adccr1 should be set to "1". note 3: during conversion, do not perform port output instruction to maintain a precision for all of the pins because analog inp ut port use as general input port. and for port near to anal og input, do not input intense signaling of change. note 4: the adccr1 is automatically cleared to "0" after starting conversion. note 5: do not set adccr1 newly again during ad conv ersion. before setting adccr1 newly again, check adcdr2 to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (intadc) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling routine). note 6: after stop or slow/sleep mode are started, ad conver ter control register1 (adccr1) is all initialized and no data can be written in this register. therfore, to use ad converter again, set the adccr1 newly after returning to normal1 or normal2 mode. ad converter control register 1 adccr1 (001ch) 76543210 adrs amd ainds sain (initial value: 0001 0000) adrs ad conversion start 0: 1: - ad conversion start r/w amd ad operating mode 00: 01: 10: 11: ad operation disable software start mode reserved repeat mode ainds analog input control 0: 1: analog input enable analog input disable sain analog input channel select 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111: ain0 ain1 ain2 ain3 ain4 ain5 ain6 ain7 reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved
page 133 TMP86FH46ANG note 1: always set bit0 in adccr2 to "0" and set bit4 in adccr2 to "1". note 2: when a read instruction for adccr2, bi t6 to 7 in adccr2 read in as undefined data. note 3: after stop or slow/sleep mode are started, ad conver ter control register2 (adccr2) is all initialized and no data can be written in this register. therfore, to use ad converter again, set the adccr2 newly after returning to normal1 or normal2 mode. note 1: setting for " ? " in the above table are inhibited. fc: high frequency oscillation clock [hz] note 2: set conversion time setting should be kept more t han the following time by analog reference voltage (varef) . ad converter control register 2 adccr2 (001dh) 76543210 irefon "1" ack "0" (initial value: **0* 000*) irefon da converter (ladder resistor) connection control 0: 1: connected only during ad conversion always connected r/w ack ad conversion time select (refer to the following table about the con- version time) 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: 39/fc reserved 78/fc 156/fc 312/fc 624/fc 1248/fc reserved table 12-1 ack setting and conversion time condition conversion time 16 mhz 8 mhz 4 mhz 2 mhz 10 mhz 5 mhz 2.5 mhz ack 000 39/fc - - - 19.5 s - - 15.6 s 001 reserved 010 78/fc - - 19.5 s 39.0 s - 15.6 s 31.2 s 011 156/fc - 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 15.6 s 31.2 s 62.4 s 100 312/fc 19.5 s39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s 31.2 s 62.4 s124.8 s 101 624/fc 39.0 s78.0 s 156.0 s - 62.4 s124.8 s- 110 1248/fc 78.0 s 156.0 s - - 124.8 s- - 111 reserved - varef = 4.5 to 5.5 v 15.6 s and more - varef = 2.7 to 5.5 v 31.2 s and more ad converted value register 1 adcdr1 (001fh) 76543210 ad09 ad08 ad07 ad06 ad05 ad04 ad03 ad02 (initial value: 0000 0000) ad converted value register 2 adcdr2 (001eh) 76543210 ad01 ad00 eocf adbf (initial value: 0000 ****)
page 134 12. 10-bit ad converter (adc) 12.2 register configuration TMP86FH46ANG note 1: the adcdr2 is cleared to "0" when reading the a dcdr1. therfore, the ad conversion result should be read to adcdr2 more first than adcdr1. note 2: the adcdr2 is set to "1" when ad conversion star ts, and cleared to "0" when ad conversion finished. it also is cleared upon entering stop mode or slow mode . note 3: if a read instruction is executed for a dcdr2, read data of bit3 to bit0 are unstable. eocf ad conversion end flag 0: 1: before or during conversion conversion completed read only adbf ad conversion busy flag 0: 1: during stop of ad conversion during ad conversion
page 135 TMP86FH46ANG 12.3 function 12.3.1 software start mode after setting adccr1 to ?01? (software start mode), set adccr1 to ?1?. ad conver- sion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by adccr1 is thereby started. after completion of the ad conversion, the conversion result is stored in ad converted value registers (adcdr1, adcdr2) and at the same time adcdr2 is set to 1, the ad conversion finished inter- rupt (intadc) is generated. adrs is automatically cleared afte r ad conversion has started. do not set adccr1 newly again (restart) during ad conversion. before setting adrs newly again, check adcdr2 to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signa l (intadc) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling rou- tine). figure 12-2 software start mode 12.3.2 repeat mode ad conversion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by adccr1 is performed repeatedly. in this mode, ad conversion is started by setti ng adccr1 to ?1? after setting adccr1 to ?11? (repeat mode). after completion of the ad conversion, the conversion result is stored in ad converted value registers (adcdr1, adcdr2) and at the same time adcdr2 is set to 1, the ad conversion finished inter- rupt (intadc) is generated. in repeat mode, each time one ad conversion is complete d, the next ad conversion is started. to stop ad conversion, set adccr1 to ?00? (disable mode) by writing 0s. the ad convert operation is stopped immediately. the converted valu e at this time is not stored in the ad converted value register. adcdr1 status eocf cleared by reading conversion result conversion result read adcdr2 intadc interrupt request adcdr2 adccr1 1st conversion result 2nd conversion result indeterminate ad conversion start ad conversion start a dcdr1 a dcdr2 conversion result read conversion result read conversion result read
page 136 12. 10-bit ad converter (adc) 12.3 function TMP86FH46ANG figure 12-3 repeat mode 12.3.3 regi ster setting 1. set up the ad converter control register 1 (adccr1) as follows: ? choose the channel to ad convert using ad input channel select (sain). ? specify analog input enable fo r analog input control (ainds). ? specify amd for the ad converter control operation mode (software or repeat mode). 2. set up the ad converter control register 2 (adccr2) as follows: ? set the ad conversion time using ad conversion time (ack). for details on how to set the con- version time, refer to figure 12-1 and ad converter control register 2. ? choose irefon for da converter control. 3. after setting up (1) and (2) above, set ad conversion start (adrs) of ad converter control register 1 (adccr1) to ?1?. if software start mode has been selected, ad conversi on starts immediately. 4. after an elapse of the specified ad conversion time, the ad converted value is stored in ad con- verted value register 1 (adcdr1) and the ad conv ersion finished flag (e ocf) of ad converted value register 2 (adcdr2) is set to ?1?, upon wh ich time ad conversion interrupt intadc is gener- ated. 5. eocf is cleared to ?0? by a read of the conversion result. however, if reconverted before a register read, although eocf is cl eared the previous conversi on result is retained until the next conversion is completed. a dcdr1,adcdr2 eocf cleared by reading conversion result conversion result read a dcdr2 intadc interrupt request conversion operation a dccr1 indeterminate ad conversion start adccr1 ?11? ?00? 1st conversion result ad convert operation suspended. conversion result is not stored. 2nd conversion result 3rd conversion result a dcdr1 a dcdr2 2nd conversion result 3rd conversion result 1st conversion result conversion result read conversion result read conversion result read conversion result read conversion result read
page 137 TMP86FH46ANG 12.4 stop/slow modes during ad conversion when standby mode (stop or slow mode) is entered fo rcibly during ad conversi on, the ad convert operation is suspended and the ad converter is in itialized (adccr1 and adccr2 are initia lized to initial value). also, the conversion result is indeterminate. (conversion results up to the previous operation are cleared, so be sure to read the conversion results before entering standby mode (sto p or slow mode).) when restored from standby mode (stop or slow mode), ad conversion is not automatically restarted, so it is necessa ry to restart ad conversion. note that since the analog reference voltage is automatically disconnected, there is no possibility of current flowing into the analog reference voltage. example :after selecting the conversion time 19.5 s at 16 mhz and the analog input channel ain3 pin, perform ad con- version once. after checking eocf, read the converted value, store the lower 2 bits in address 0009eh nd store the upper 8 bits in address 0009fh in ram. the operation mode is software start mode. : (port setting) : ;set port register approrriately before setting ad converter registers. : : (refer to section i/o port in details) ld (adccr1) , 00100011b ; select ain3 ld (adccr2) , 11011000b ;select conversion time(312/fc) and operation mode set (adccr1) . 7 ; adrs = 1(ad conversion start) sloop : test (adcdr2) . 5 ; eocf= 1 ? jrs t, sloop ld a , (adcdr2) ; read result data ld (9eh) , a ld a , (adcdr1) ; read result data ld (9fh), a
page 138 12. 10-bit ad converter (adc) 12.5 analog input voltage and ad conversion result TMP86FH46ANG 12.5 analog input voltage and ad conversion result the analog input voltage is corresponded to the 10-bit dig ital value converted by the ad as shown in figure 12-4. figure 12-4 analog i nput voltage and ad c onversion result (typ.) 1 0 01 h 02 h 03 h 3fd h 3fe h 3ff h 2 3 1021 1022 1023 1024 analog input voltage 1024 ad conversion result varef avss
page 139 TMP86FH46ANG 12.6 precautions about ad converter 12.6.1 analog input pin voltage range make sure the analog input pins (ain0 to ain7) are used at voltages within varef to avss. if any voltage outside this range is applied to one of the analog input pins, the converted value on that pin becomes uncertain. the other analog input pins also are affected by that. 12.6.2 analog input shared pins the analog input pins (ain0 to ain7) are shared w ith input/output ports. when using any of the analog inputs to execute ad conversion, do not execute input/output instructions for all other ports. this is necessary to prevent the accuracy of ad conversi on from degrading. not only these analog input sh ared pins, some other pins may also be affected by noise arising from input/o utput to and from adjacent pins. 12.6.3 noise countermeasure the internal equivalent circuit of the analog input pins is shown in figure 12-5. the higher the output impedance of the analog input source, more easily they are susceptible to no ise. therefore, make sure the out- put impedance of the signal source in your design is 5 k ? or less. toshiba also recommends attaching a capac- itor external to the chip. figure 12-5 analog i nput equivalent circuit and exam ple of input pin processing da converter aini analog comparator internal resistance permissible signal source impedance internal capacitance 5 k ? (typ) c = 12 pf (typ.) 5 k ? (max) note) i = 7 to 0
page 140 12. 10-bit ad converter (adc) 12.6 precautions about ad converter TMP86FH46ANG
page 141 TMP86FH46ANG 13. key-on wakeup (kwu) in the TMP86FH46ANG, the stop mode is released by not only p20( int5 / stop ) pin but also four (stop2 to stop5) pins. when the stop mode is released by stop2 to stop5 pins, the stop pin needs to be used. in details, refer to the following section " 13.2 control ". 13.1 configuration figure 13-1 key-on wakeup circuit 13.2 control stop2 to stop5 pins can controlled by key-on wakeup c ontrol register (stopcr). it can be configured as enable/disable in 1-bit unit. when thos e pins are used for stop mode releas e, configure corresponding i/o pins to input mode by i/o port register beforehand. 13.3 function stop mode can be entered by setting up the system control register (syscr1), and can be exited by detecting the "l" level on stop2 to stop5 pins, which are enabled by stopcr, for releasing stop mode (note1). key-on wakeup control register stopcr76543210 (0031h) stop5 stop4 stop3 stop2 (initial value: 0000 ****) stop5 stop mode released by stop5 0:disable 1:enable write only stop4 stop mode released by stop4 0:disable 1:enable write only stop3 stop mode released by stop3 0:disable 1:enable write only stop2 stop mode released by stop2 0:disable 1:enable write only stopcr int5 stop stop mode release signal (1: release) (0031h) stop2 stop3 stop4 stop5 stop2 stop3 stop4 stop5
page 142 13. key-on wakeup (kwu) 13.3 function TMP86FH46ANG also, each level of the stop2 to stop5 pins can be co nfirmed by reading correspondi ng i/o port data register, check all stop2 to stop5 pins "h" that is enabled by stopcr before the stop mode is startd (note2,3). note 1: when the stop mode released by the edge release mo de (syscr1 = ?0?), inhibit input from stop2 to stop5 pins by key-on wakeup control register (stopcr) or must be set "h" level into stop2 to stop5 pins that are available input during stop mode. note 2: when the stop pin input is high or stop2 to stop5 pins input which is enabled by stopcr is low, executing an instruction which starts stop mode wi ll not place in stop mode but instead will immediately start the release sequence (warm up). note 3: the input circuit of key-on wakeup input and port i nput is separated?aso each input voltage threshold value is diffrent. therefore, a value comes from port input before stop mode start may be diffrent from a value which is detected by key-on wakeup input (figure 13-2). note 4: stop pin doesn?t have the control register such as stop cr, so when stop mode is released by stop2 to stop5 pins, stop pin also should be used as stop mode release function. note 5: in stop mode, key-on wakeup pin which is enabled as input mode (for releasing stop mode) by key-on wakeup control register (stopcr) may genarate the penet ration current, so the said pin must be disabled ad conversion input (analog voltage input). note 6: when the stop mode is released by stop2 to stop5 pins, the level of stop pin should hold "l" level (figure 13-3). figure 13-2 key-on wakeup input and port input figure 13-3 priority of stop pin and stop2 to stop5 pins table 13-1 release level (edge) of stop mode pin name release level (edge) syscr1="1" (note2) syscr1="0" stop "h" level rising edge stop2 "l" level don?t use (note1) stop3 "l" level don?t use (note1) stop4 "l" level don?t use (note1) stop5 "l" level don?t use (note1) port input external pin key-on wakeup input stop pin a) stop release stop mode stop mode stop pin "l" b) release stop mode stop mode in case of stop2 to stop5 stop2 pin
page 143 TMP86FH46ANG 14. flash memory TMP86FH46ANG has 16384byte flash memory (address: c000h to ffffh). the write and erase operations to the flash memory are controlled in the following three types of mode. - mcu mode the flash memory is accessed by the cpu control in the mcu mode. this mode is used for software bug correction and firmware change after shipment of the device since the write operation to the flash memory is available by retaining the application behavior. - serial prom mode the flash memory is accessed by the cpu control in th e serial prom mode. use of the serial interface (uart) enables the flash memory to be controlled by the small number of pins. TMP86FH46ANG in the serial prom mode supports on-board programming wh ich enables users to prog ram flash memory after the microcontroller is mounted on a user board. - parallel prom mode the parallel prom mode allows the flash memory to be accessed as a stand-alone flash memory by the program writer provided by the third party. high-speed access to th e flash memory is available by control- ling address and data signals directly. for the suppor t of the program writer, please ask toshiba sales rep- resentative. in the mcu and serial prom modes, the flash memory c ontrol register (flscr) is used for flash memory con- trol. this chapter describes how to acce ss the flash memory using the flash memo ry control register (flscr) in the mcu and serial prom modes.
page 144 14. flash memory 14.1 flash memory control TMP86FH46ANG 14.1 flash memory control the flash memory is controlled via the flash memory control register (flscr) and flash memory stanby control resister (flsstb). note 1: the command sequence of the flash me mory can be executed only when flsmd=" 0011b". in other cases, any attempts to execute the command sequence are ineffective. note 2: flsmd must be set to either "1100b" or "0011b". note 3: bits 3 through 0 in flscr are always read as don?t care. note 1: when fstb is set to 1, do not execute the read/write in struction to the flash memory bec ause there is a possibility that the expected data is not read or the program is not operated correctl y. if executing the read/write instruction, fstb is initial- ized to 0 automatically. note 2: if an interrupt is issued when fstb is set to 1, fstb is initialized to 0 automatically and then the vector area of the flash memory is read. note 3: if the idle0/1/2, sleep0/1/2 or stop mode is activated when fstb is set to 1, fstb is initialized to 0 automatically. in the idle0/1/2, sleep0/1/2 or stop mode, the standby function operates regardless of fstb setting. 14.1.1 flash memory command sequenc e execution control (flscr) the flash memory can be protected fr om inadvertent write due to program error or microcontroller misoper- ation. this write protection feature is realized by disabling flash memo ry command sequence execution via the flash memory control register (write protect). to enable command sequence execution, set flscr to ?0011b?. to disable comman d sequence execution, set flscr to ?1100b?. after reset, flscr is initialized to ?1100b? to disable command sequence execution. normally, flscr should be set to ?1100b? except when the flash memory needs to be written or erased. 14.1.2 flash memory stan dby control (flsstb) low power consumption is enabled by cutting off the steady-state current of the flash memory. in the idle0/1/2, sleep0/1/2 or stop mode, th e steady-state current of the flas h memory is cut off automatically. when the program is executed in the ram area (with out accessing the flash me mory) in the normal 1/2 or slow1/2 mode, the current can be cut off by the contro l of the register. to cut off the steady-state current of the flash memory, set flsstb to ?1? by the c ontrol program in the ram area. the procedures for controlling the flsstb regi ster are explained below. (steps1 and 2 are controlled by the program in the flash memory, and steps 3 through 8 are controlled by the write control program ex ecuted in the ram area.) flash memory control register flscr76543210 (0fffh) flsmd (initial value : 1100 ****) flsmd flash memory command sequence exe- cution control 1100: disable command sequence execution 0011: enable command sequence execution others: reserved r/w flash memory standby control register flsstb76543210 (0fe9h) fstb (initial value : **** ***0) fstb flash memory standby control 0: disable the standby function. 1: enable the standby function. write only
page 145 TMP86FH46ANG 1. transfer the control program of th e flsstb register to the ram area. 2. jump to the ram area. 3. disable (di) the interrupt mast er enable flag (imf = ?0?). 4. set flsstb to ?1?. 5. execute the user program. 6. repeat step 5 until the return requ est to the flash memory is detected. 7. set flsstb to ?0?. 8. jump to the flash memory area. note 1: the standby function is not operated by setting fl sstb with the program in the flash memory. you must set flsstb by the program in the ram area. note 2: to use the standby function by setting flsstb to ?1? with the program in the ram area, flsstb must be set to ?0? by the program in the ram area before returning the program control to the flash memory. if the program control is returned to the flash memory with flsstb set to ?1?, the program may misoperate and run out of control.
page 146 14. flash memory 14.2 command sequence TMP86FH46ANG 14.2 command sequence the command sequence in the mcu and the serial prom modes consists of six commands (jedec compatible), as shown in table 14-1. addresses specified in the command sequence are recogni zed with the lower 12 bits (excluding ba, sa, and ff7fh used for read protection). the upper 4 bits are used to specify the flash memory area, note 1: set the address and data to be written. note 2: the area to be erased is specified with the upper 4 bits of the address. 14.2.1 byte program this command writes the fl ash memory for each byte unit. the addresse s and data to be written are specified in the 4th bus write cycle. each byte can be programmed in a maximum of 40 s. the next command sequence cannot be executed until the write operation is completed. to check the completion of the write operation, per- form read operations repeat edly until the same data is read twice fr om the same address in the flash memory. during the write operation, any consecutive attempts to r ead from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling between 0 and 1). note:to rewrite data to flash memory addresses at which dat a (including ffh) is already written, make sure to erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data. 14.2.2 sector erase (4-kbyte erase) this command erases the flash memory in units of 4 k bytes. the flash memory area to be erased is specified by the upper 4 bits of the 6th bus write cycle address. for example, to erase 4 kbytes from f000h to ffffh, specify one of the addresses in f000 h-ffffh as the 6th bus wr ite cycle. the sector erase command is effec- tive only in the mcu and serial prom modes, and it cannot be used in the parallel prom mode. a maximum of 30 ms is required to erase 4 kbytes. the next command sequence cannot be executed until the erase operation is completed. to check the completion of the erase operation, perf orm read operations repeat- edly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. during the erase operation, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling between 0 and 1). table 14-1 command sequence command sequence 1st bus write cycle 2nd bus write cycle 3rd bus write cycle 4th bus write cycle 5th bus write cycle 6th bus write cycle address data address data address data address data address data address data 1 byte program 555h aah aaah 55h 555h a0h ba (note 1) data (note 1) ---- 2 sector erase (4-kbyte erase) 555h aah aaah 55h 555h 80h 555h aah aaah 55h sa (note 2) 30h 3 chip erase (all erase) 555h aah aaah 55h 555h 80h 555h aah aaah 55h 555h 10h 4product id entry555haahaaah55h555h90h------ 5 product id exitxxhf0h---------- product id exit555haahaaah55h555hf0h------ 6read protect555haahaaah55h555ha5hff7fh00h----
page 147 TMP86FH46ANG 14.2.3 chip erase (all erase) this command erases the entire flash memory in appr oximately 30 ms. the next command sequence cannot be executed until the erase operation is completed. to check the completio n of the erase operation, perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. during the erase operation, any consecutive attemp ts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling between 0 and 1). after the chip is erased, all bytes contain ffh. 14.2.4 product id entry this command activates the product id mode. in the product id mode, the vendor id, the flash id, and the read protection status can be read from the flash memory. note: the value at address f002h (flash size) depends on the size of flash memory incorporated in each product. for example, if the product has 60-kbyte flash memory, "0eh" is read from address f002h. 14.2.5 product id exit this command is used to exit the product id mode. 14.2.6 read protect this command enables the r ead protection setting in the flash memory . when the read protection is enabled, the flash memory cannot be read in the parallel prom mode. in the seri al prom mode, the flash write and ram loader commands cannot be executed. to disable the read protection setting, it is necessary to execute the chip eras e command sequence. whether or not the read protection is enabled can be checked by reading ff7fh in the product id mode. for details, see table 14-2. it takes a maximum of 40 s to set read protection in the flash memory. the next command sequence cannot be executed until this operation is completed. to check the completion of the read protect operation, perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. during the read protect operation, any attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling between 0 and 1). table 14-2 values to be read in the product id mode address meaning read value f000h vendor id 98h f001h flash macro id 41h f002h flash size 0eh: 60 kbytes 0bh: 48 kbytes 07h: 32 kbytes 05h: 24 kbytes 03h: 16 kbytes 01h: 8 kbytes 00h: 4 kbytes ff7fh read protection status ffh: read protection disabled other than ffh: read protection enabled
page 148 14. flash memory 14.3 toggle bit (d6) TMP86FH46ANG 14.3 toggle bit (d6) after the byte program, chip erase, and read protect command sequence is executed, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 (d6) of the data (toggling between 0 and 1) until the operation is com- pleted. therefore, this toggle bit provides a software mechanism to check the completion of each operation. usually perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until th e same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. after the byte program, chip erase, or read protect command sequence is executed, the initial read of the toggle bit always produces a "1".
page 149 TMP86FH46ANG 14.4 access to the flash memory area when the write, erase and read protect ions are set in the flash memory, read and fetch operations cannot be per- formed in the entire flash memory area. therefore, to perform these operations in the entire flash memory area, access to the flash memory area by the control program in the bootrom or ram area. (the flash memory pro- gram cannot write to the flash memory.) the serial prom or mcu mode is used to run the control program in the bootrom or ram area. note 1: the flash memory can be written or read for each by te unit. erase operations can be performed either in the entire area or in units of 4 kbytes, whereas read operations can be performed by an one transfer instruction. however, the command sequence method is adopted for write and erase operations, requiring several-byte transfer instruc- tions for each operation. note 2: to rewrite data to flash memory addresses at which data (including ffh) is already written, make sure to erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data. 14.4.1 flash memory contro l in the serial prom mode the serial prom mode is used to access to the fl ash memory by the contro l program provided in the bootrom area. since almost of all op erations relating to access to the flash memory can be controlled sim- ply by the communication data of th e serial interface (uart), these functio ns are transparent to the user. for the details of the serial prom mode, see ?serial prom mode.? to access to the flash memory by using peripheral func tions in the serial prom mode, run the ram loader command to execute the control prog ram in the ram area. the procedures to execute the control program in the ram area is shown in " 14.4.1.1 how to write to the flash memory by executing the control program in the ram area (in the ram loader mode within the serial prom mode) ". 14.4.1.1 how to write to the flash memory by executing the control program in the ram area (in the ram loader mode within the serial prom mode) (steps 1 and 2 are controlled by the bootrom, and steps 3 through 9 are controlled by the control program executed in the ram area.) 1. transfer the write control program to the ram area in the ram loader mode. 2. jump to the ram area. 3. disable (di) the interrup t master enable flag (imf "0"). 4. set flscr to "0011b" (to enable command sequence execution). 5. execute the erase command sequence. 6. read the same flash memory address twice. (repeat step 6 until the same data is re ad by two consecutive reads operations.) 7. execute the write command sequence. 8. read the same flash memory address twice. (repeat step 8 until the same data is read by two consecutive reads operations.) 9. set flscr to "1100b" (to disable command sequence execution). note 1: before writing to the flash memory in the ram area, disable interrupts by setting the interrupt master enable flag (imf) to "0". usually disable interrupts by executing the di instruction at the head of the write control program in the ram area. note 2: since the watchdog timer is disabled by the boot rom in the ram loader mode, it is not required to disable the watchdog timer by the ram loader program.
page 150 14. flash memory 14.4 access to the flash memory area TMP86FH46ANG example :after chip erasure, the program in the ram area writ es data 3fh to address f000h. di : disable interrupts (imf "0") ld (flscr),0011_1000b : enable command sequence execution. ld ix,0f555h ld iy,0faaah ld hl,0f000h ; #### flash memory chip erase process #### ld (ix),0aah : 1st bus write cycle ld (iy),55h : 2nd bus write cycle ld (ix),80h : 3rd bus write cycle ld (ix),0aah : 4th bus write cycle ld (iy),55h : 5th bus write cycle ld (ix),10h : 6th bus write cycle sloop1: ld w,(ix) cmp w,(ix) jr nz,sloop1 : loop until the same value is read. ; #### flash memory write process #### ld (ix),0aah : 1st bus write cycle ld (iy),55h : 2nd bus write cycle ld (ix),0a0h : 3rd bus write cycle ld (hl),3fh : 4th bus write cycle, (f000h)=3fh sloop2: ld w,(hl) cmp w,(hl) jr nz,sloop2 : loop until the same value is read. ld (flscr),1100_1000b : disable command sequence execution. sloop3: jp sloop3
page 151 TMP86FH46ANG 14.4.2 flash memory c ontrol in the mcu mode in the mcu mode, write operations are performed by executing the control program in the ram area. before execution of the control pr ogram, copy the control program into the ram area or obtain it from the external using the communication pin. the procedures to execute the cont rol program in the ram area in the mcu mode are described below. 14.4.2.1 how to write to the flash memory by executing a user write control program in the ram area (in the mcu mode) (steps 1 and 2 are controlled by the program in the flash memory, and steps 3 through 11 are controlled by the control program in the ram area.) 1. transfer the write contro l program to the ram area. 2. jump to the ram area. 3. disable (di) the interrup t master enable flag (imf "0"). 4. disable the watchdog timer, if it is used. 5. set flscr to "0011b" (to enable command sequence execution). 6. execute the erase command sequence. 7. read the same flash memory address twice. (repeat step 7 until the same data is read by two consecutive read operations.) 8. execute the write command sequence. 9. read the same flash memory address twice. (repeat step 9 until the same data is read by two consecutive read operations.) 10. set flscr to "1100b" (to disable command sequence execution). 11. jump to the flash memory area. note 1: before writing to the flash memory in the ram area, disable interrupts by setting the interrupt master enable flag (imf) to "0". usually disable interrupts by executing the di instruction at the head of the write control program in the ram area. note 2: when writing to the flash memory, do not in tentionally use non-maskable interrupts (the watchdog timer must be disabled if it is used). if a non-mask able interrupt occurs while the flash memory is being written, unexpected data is read from the flash memory (interrupt vector), resulting in malfunc- tion of the microcontroller.
page 152 14. flash memory 14.4 access to the flash memory area TMP86FH46ANG example :after sector eras ure (e000h-efffh), the program in the ram area writes data 3fh to address e000h. di : disable interrupts (imf "0") ld (wdtcr2),4eh : clear the wdt binary counter. ldw (wdtcr1),0b101h : disable the wdt. ld (flscr),0011_1000b : enable command sequence execution. ld ix,0f555h ld iy,0faaah ld hl,0e000h ; #### flash memory sector erase process #### ld (ix),0aah : 1st bus write cycle ld (iy),55h : 2nd bus write cycle ld (ix),80h : 3rd bus write cycle ld (ix),0aah : 4th bus write cycle ld (iy),55h : 5th bus write cycle ld (hl),30h : 6th bus write cycle sloop1: ld w,(ix) cmp w,(ix) jr nz,sloop1 : loop until the same value is read. ; #### flash memory write process #### ld (ix),0aah : 1st bus write cycle ld (iy),55h : 2nd bus write cycle ld (ix),0a0h : 3rd bus write cycle ld (hl),3fh : 4th bus write cycle, (1000h)=3fh sloop2: ld w,(hl) cmp w,(hl) jr nz,sloop2 : loop until the same value is read. ld (flscr),1100_1000b : disable command sequence execution. jp xxxxh : jump to the flash memory area. example :this write control program reads data from address f000h and stores it to 98h in the ram area. ld a,(0f000h) : read data from address f000h. ld (98h),a : store data to address 98h.
page 153 TMP86FH46ANG 15. serial prom mode 15.1 outline the TMP86FH46ANG has a 2048 byte bootrom (mask rom) for programming to flash memory. the bootrom is available in the serial prom mode, and controlled by test, boot and reset pins. communica- tion is performed via uart. the serial prom mode ha s seven types of operating mode: flash memory writing, ram loader, flash memory sum output, product id code output, flash memory status output, flash memory eras- ing and flash memory read protection setting. memory addr ess mapping in the serial pr om mode differs from that in the mcu mode. figure 15-1 shows memory address mapping in the serial prom mode. note: though included in above operating range, some of high fr equencies are not supported in the serial prom mode. for details, refer to ?table 15-5?. 15.2 memory mapping the figure 15-1 shows memory mapping in the serial prom mode and mcu mode. in the serial prom mode, the bootrom (mask rom) is mapped in addresses from 7800h to 7fffh. figure 15-1 memory address maps table 15-1 operating range in the serial prom mode parameter min max unit power supply 4.5 5.5 v high frequency (note) 2 16 mhz 003fh 0000h 64 bytes 2048 bytes 0040h 7800h 7fffh c000h ffffh ffffh sfr ram dbr sfr ram dbr bootrom flash memory serial prom mode mcu mode 16384 bytes 003fh 0000h 64 bytes 0040h flash memory c000h 16384 bytes 0fffh 0fffh 512 bytes 128 bytes 128 bytes 023fh 0f80h 0f80h 512 bytes 023fh
page 154 15. serial prom mode 15.3 serial prom mode setting TMP86FH46ANG 15.3 serial prom mode setting 15.3.1 serial prom mode control pins to execute on-board programming, act ivate the serial prom mode. table 15-2 shows pin setting to activate the serial prom mode. note: the boot pin is shared with the uart communication pin (rxd pin) in the serial prom m ode. this pin is used as uart communication pin after activating serial prom mode 15.3.2 pin function in the serial prom mode, tx d (p03) and rxd (p02 ) are used as a serial interface pin. note 1: during on-board programming with other parts mounted on a user board, be careful no to affect these communication control pins. note 2: operating range of high frequency in serial prom mode is 2 mhz to 16 mhz. table 15-2 serial prom mode setting pin setting test pin high boot/rxd pin high reset pin table 15-3 pin function in the serial prom mode pin name (serial prom mode) input/ output function pin name (mcu mode) txd output serial data output (note 1) p03 boot/rxd input/input serial prom mode control/serial data input p02 reset input/out- put serial prom mode control reset test input fixed to high test vdd, avdd power supply 4.5 to 5.5 v vss, avss power supply 0 v varef power supply leave open or apply input reference voltage. i/o ports except p03, p02 i/o these ports are in the high-impedance state in the serial prom mode. the input level is fixed to the port inputs with a hardware feature to prevent overlap current. (the port inputs are invalid.) to make the port inputs valid, set the pin of the spcr register to ?1? by the ram loader control pro- gram. xin input self-oscillate with an oscillator. (note 2) xout output
page 155 TMP86FH46ANG figure 15-2 serial prom mode pin setting note 1: for connection of other pins, refer to " t able 15-3 pin function in the serial prom mode ". 15.3.3 example connection for on-board writing figure 15-3 shows an example connection to perform on-board wring. figure 15-3 example conn ection for on-board writing note 1: when other parts on the application board effect th e uart communication in the serial prom mode, iso- late these pins by a jumper or switch. note 2: when the reset control circuit on the application board effect s activation of the serial prom mode, isolate the pin by a jumper or switch. note 3: for connection of other pins, refer to " t able 15-3 pin function in the serial prom mode ". vdd(4.5 v to 5.5 v) serial prom mode mcu mode vdd test reset external control pull-up xin xout vss gnd boot / rxd (p02) txd (p03) TMP86FH46ANG vdd(4.5 v to 5.5 v) serial prom mode mcu mode vdd test reset pc control pull-up level converter xin xout vss gnd external control board application board rc power-on reset circuit reset control other parts (note 1) (note 2) boot / rxd (p02) txd (p03)
page 156 15. serial prom mode 15.3 serial prom mode setting TMP86FH46ANG 15.3.4 activating t he serial prom mode the following is a procedure to ac tivate the serial prom mode. " figure 15-4 serial prom mode timing " shows a serial prom mode timing. 1. supply power to the vdd pin. 2. set the reset pin to low. 3. set the test pin and boot/rxd pins to high. 4. wait until the power supply and clock oscillation stabilize. 5. set the reset pin to high. 6. input the matching data (5ah) to the boot/rxd pin after setup sequence. for details of the setup timing, refer to " 15.16 uart timing ". figure 15-4 serial prom mode timing vdd test(input) reset(input) program setup time for serial prom mode (rxsup) high level setting matching data don't care reset mode serial prom mode input boot/rxd (input)
page 157 TMP86FH46ANG 15.4 interface specifications for uart the following shows the uart communication format used in the serial prom mode. to perform on-board programming, the communication format of the write controller must also be set in the same manner. the default baud rate is 9600 bps regardless of operating frequency of the microcontroller. the baud rate can be modified by transmitting the baud rate modification data shown in table 1-4 to TMP86FH46ANG. the table 15-5 shows an operating frequency and baud rate. the frequencies which are not described in table 15-5 can not be used. - baud rate (default): 9600 bps - data length: 8 bits - parity addition: none - stop bit: 1 bit table 15-4 baud rate modification data baud rate modification data 04h 05h 06h 07h 0ah 18h 28h baud rate (bps) 76800 62500 57600 38400 31250 19200 9600
page 158 15. serial prom mode 15.4 interface specifications for uart TMP86FH46ANG note 1: ?ref. frequency? and ?rating? show frequencies availabl e in the serial prom mode. though the frequency is supported in the serial prom mode, the serial prom mode may not be activated correctly due to the frequency difference in the external controller (such as pers onal computer) and oscillator, and load capacitance of communication pins. note 2: it is recommended that the total frequency difference is within 3% so that auto detection is performed correctly by the ref- erence frequency. note 3: the external controller must transmit the matching dat a (5ah) repeatedly till the auto detection of baud rate is perform ed. this number indicates the number of times t he matching data is transmitted for each frequency. table 15-5 operating frequency and baud rate in the serial prom mode (note 3) reference baud rate (bps) 76800 62500 57600 38400 31250 19200 9600 baud rate modification data 04h 05h 06h 07h 0ah 18h 28h ref. fre- quency (mhz) rating (mhz) baud rate (bps) (%)(bps)(%)(bps)(%)(bps)(%)(bps)(%)(bps)(%)(bps)(%) 1 21.91 to 2.10------------9615+0.16 2 43.82 to 4.19--------312500.0019231+0.169615+0.16 4.193.82 to 4.19--------32734+4.7520144+4.921 0072 +4.92 3 4.91524.70 to 5.16------ 38400 0.00 - - 19200 0.00 9600 0.00 54.70 to 5.16------ 39063 +1.73 - - 19531 +1.73 9766 +1.73 4 65.87 to 6.45------------9375-2.34 6.1445.87 to 6.45------------96000.00 5 7.3728 7.05 to 7.74 - - - 57600 0.00 - - - - 19200 0.00 9600 0.00 6 8 7.64 to 8.39 - - 62500 0.00 - - 38462 +0.16 31250 0.00 19231 +0.16 9615 +0.16 7 9.8304 9.40 to 10.32 76800 0.00 ---- 38400 0.00 - - 19200 0.00 9600 0.00 10 9.40 to 10.32 78125 +1.73 ---- 39063 +1.73 - - 19531 +1.73 9766 +1.73 8 12 11.75 to 12.90 - - - - 57692 +0.16 - - 31250 0.00 18750 -2.34 9375 -2.34 12.288 11.75 to 12.90 - - - - 59077 +2.56 - - 32000 +2.40 19200 0.00 9600 0.00 12.5 11.75 to 12.90 - - 60096 -3.85 60096 +4.33 - - 30048 -3.85 19531 +1.73 9766 +1.73 9 14.7456 14.10 to 15.48 - - - - 57600 0.00 38400 0.00 - - 19200 0.00 9600 0.00 10 16 15.27 to 16.77 76923 +0.16 62500 0.00 - - 38462 +0.16 31250 0.00 19231 +0.16 9615 +0.16
page 159 TMP86FH46ANG 15.5 operation command the eight commands shown in table 15-6 are used in the serial prom mode. after reset release, the TMP86FH46ANG waits for the matching data (5ah). 15.6 operation mode the serial prom mode has seven types of modes, that are (1) flash memory erasin g, (2) flash memory writing, (3) ram loader, (4) flash memory sum output, (5) product id code output, (6) flash memory status output and (7) flash memory read protection setting modes. description of each mode is shown below. 1. flash memory erasing mode the flash memory is erased by the chip erase (erasing an entire flash area) or sector erase (erasing sectors in 4-kbyte units). the erased area is filled with ffh. when the read protection is enabled, the sector erase in the flash erasing mode can not be performed. to disabl e the read protection, perfor m the chip erase. before erasing the flash memory, tmp86fh4 6ang checks the passwords except a blank product. if the password is not matched, the flash memory erasing mode is not activated. 2. flash memory writing mode data is written to the specified flas h memory address for each byte unit. the external controller must trans- mit the write data in the intel hex format (binary). if no error is encountered till the end record, TMP86FH46ANG calculates the checksum for the entir e flash memory area (c000h to ffffh), and returns the obtained result to the ex ternal controller. when the read prot ection is enabled, the flash memory writing mode is not activated. in this case, perform the chip erase command beforehand in the flash mem- ory erasing mode. before activating the flash me mory writing mode, TMP86FH46ANG checks the pass- word except a blank product. if the password is not matched, flash memory writing mode is not activated. 3. ram loader mode the ram loader transfers the data in intel hex format sent from the external controller to the internal ram. when the transfer is completed normally, the ram loader calculates the checksum. after transmit- ting the results, the ram loader jump s to the ram address specified with the first data record in order to execute the user program. when the read protection is enabled, the ram loader mode is not activated. in this case, perform the chip erase beforehand in the fl ash memory erasing mode. before activating the ram loader mode, tmp86fh46 ang checks the password except a blank product. if the password is not matched, flash ram loader mode is not activated. 4. flash memory sum output mode the checksum is calculated for the entire flash memory area (c000h to ffffh), and the result is returned to the external controller. since the bootrom does not support the oper ation command to read the flash memory, use this checksum to identify programs when managing revisions of application programs. 5. product id code output the code used to identify the product is output. the code to be output consists of 13-byte data, which includes the information indicating th e area of the rom incorporated in the product. the external control- ler reads this code, and recognizes the product to write. (in the case of TMP86FH46ANG, the addresses from c000h to ffffh become the rom area.) table 15-6 operation command in the serial prom mode command data operating mode description 5ah setup matching data. execute this command after releasing the reset. f0h flash memory erasing erases the flash memory area (address c000h to ffffh). 30h flash memory writing writes to the flash memory area (address c000h to ffffh). 60h ram loader writes to the specified ram area (address 0050h to 023fh). 90h flash memory sum output outputs the 2-byte checksum upper byte and lower byte in this order for the entire area of the flash memory (address c000h to ffffh). c0h product id code output outputs the product id code (13-byte data). c3h flash memory status output outputs the status code (7-byte data) such as the read protection condition. fah flash memory read protection setting enables the read protection.
page 160 15. serial prom mode 15.6 operation mode TMP86FH46ANG 6. flash memory status output mode the status of the area from ffe0h to ffffh, and the read protection co ndition are output as 7-byte code. the external controller reads this code to recognize the flash memory status. 7. flash memory read protection setting mode this mode disables reading the flash memory data in parallel prom mode. in the serial prom mode, the flash memory writing and ram loader modes are disabled. to disable th e flash memory read protection, perform the chip erase in th e flash memory erasing mode.
page 161 TMP86FH46ANG 15.6.1 flash memory erasi ng mode (operati ng command: f0h) table 15-7 shows the flash memory erasing mode. note 1: ?xxh 3? indicates that the device enters the halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of xxh. note 2: refer to " 15.13 specifying the erasure area ". note 3: refer to " 15.8 checksum (sum) ". note 4: refer to " 15.10 passwords ". note 5: do not transmit the password string for a blank product. note 6: when a password error occurs, TMP86FH46ANG stops ua rt communication and enters the halt mode. therefore, when a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FH46ANG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial prom mode. note 7: if an error occurs during transfer of a password address or a password string, TMP86FH46ANG stops uart communica- tion and enters the halt condition. therefore, when a pass word error occurs, initialize TMP86FH46ANG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial prom mode. description of the flash memory erasing mode 1. the 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and r eceived data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. table 15-7 flash memory erasing mode transfer byte transfer data from the external controller to TMP86FH46ANG baud rate transfer data from TMP86FH46ANG to the external controller boot rom 1st byte 2nd byte matching data (5ah) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - (automatic baud rate adjustment) ok: echo back data (5ah) error: no data transmitted 3rd byte 4th byte baud rate change data (table 15-4) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - ok: echo back data error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 62h 3 (note 1) 5th byte 6th byte operation command data (f0h) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: echo back data (f0h) error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 63h 3 (note 1) 7th byte 8th byte password count storage address bit 15 to 08 (note 4, 5) modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 9th byte 10th byte password count storage address bit 07 to 00 (note 4, 5) modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 11th byte 12th byte password comparison start address bit 15 to 08 (note 4, 5) modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 13th byte 14th byte password comparison start address bit 07 to 00 (note 4, 5) modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted) 15th byte : m?th byte password string (note 4, 5) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted n?th - 2 byte erase area specification (note 2) modified baud rate - n?th - 1 byte - modified baud rate ok: checksum (upper byte) (note 3) error: nothing transmitted n?th byte - modified baud rate ok: checksum (lower byte) (note 3) error: nothing transmitted n?th + 1 byte (wait for the next operation command data) modified baud rate -
page 162 15. serial prom mode 15.6 operation mode TMP86FH46ANG 2. the 5th byte of the received data contains th e command data in the flash memory erasing mode (f0h). 3. when the 5th byte of the receive d data contains the operation command data shown in table 15-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, f0h). if the 5th byte of the received data does not contai n the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of the operation command error code (63h). 4. the 7th thorough m'th bytes of the transmitted and received data contai n the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. in the case of a blank produc t, do not transmit a password string. (do not transmit a dummy password string.) 5. the n?th - 2 byte contains the erasure area specification data. the upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits specify the start address and end address of the erasure area, respectively. for the detailed description, see ?1.13 specifying the erasure area?. 6. the n?th - 1 byte and n?th byte contain the upper and lower bytes of the checksum, respectively. for how to calculate the checksum, refer to ?1.8 checksum (sum)?. checksum is calculated unless a receiving error or intel hex format error occurs. after sending the e nd record, the external controller judges whether the transmission is completed corr ectly by receiving the checksum sent by the device. 7. after sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
page 163 TMP86FH46ANG 15.6.2 flash memory writing mode (operation command: 30h) table 15-8 shows flash memory writing mode process. note 1: ?xxh 3? indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxh. for details, refer to " 15.7 error code ". note 2: refer to " 15.9 intel hex format (binary) ". note 3: refer to " 15.8 checksum (sum) ". note 4: refer to " 15.10 passwords ". note 5: if addresses from ffe0h to ffffh are filled with ?ffh?, the passwords are not compared because the device is consid- ered as a blank product. transmitting a password string is not requi red. even in the case of a blank product , it is required to specify the password count storage address and the password comparison start address. transmit these data from the external controller. if a password error occurs due to incorr ect password count storage address or password comparison start address, TMP86FH46ANG stops uart communication and enters the halt condition. therefore, when a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FH46ANG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial rom mode. note 6: if the read protection is enabled or a password error occurs, TMP86FH46ANG stops uart communication and enters the halt confition. in this case, initialize TMP86FH46ANG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial rom mode. note 7: if an error occurs during the reception of a password address or a password string, TMP86FH46ANG stops uart com- munication and enters the halt condition. in th is case, initialize TMP86FH46ANG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial prom mode. table 15-8 flash memory writing mode process transfer byte transfer data from external controller to TMP86FH46ANG baud rate transfer data from TMP86FH46ANG to external controller boot rom 1st byte 2nd byte matching data (5ah) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - (automatic baud rate adjustment) ok: echo back data (5ah) error: nothing transmitted 3rd byte 4th byte baud rate modification data (see table 15-4) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - ok: echo back data error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 62h 3 (note 1) 5th byte 6th byte operation command data (30h) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: echo back data (30h) error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 63h 3 (note 1) 7th byte 8th byte password count storage address bit 15 to 08 (note 4) modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 9th byte 10th byte password count storage address bit 07 to 00 (note 4) modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 11th byte 12th byte password comparison start address bit 15 to 08 (note 4) modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 13th byte 14th byte password comparison start address bit 07 to 00 (note 4) modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted) 15th byte : m?th byte password string (note 5) - modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted m?th + 1 byte : n?th - 2 byte intel hex format (binary) (note 2) modified baud rate - - n?th - 1 byte - modified baud rate ok: sum (upper byte) (note 3) error: nothing transmitted n?th byte - modified baud rate ok: sum (lower byte) (note 3) error: nothing transmitted n?th + 1 byte (wait state for the next operation com- mand data) modified baud rate -
page 164 15. serial prom mode 15.6 operation mode TMP86FH46ANG description of the flash memory writing mode 1. the 1st byte of the received data contains the ma tching data. when the serial prom mode is acti- vated, TMP86FH46ANG (her eafter called device), waits to recei ve the matching data (5ah). upon reception of the matching data, the device automatically adjusts the uart?s initial baud rate to 9600 bps. 2. when receiving the matching data (5ah), the device transmits an ech o back data (5ah) as the second byte data to the external controller. if the devi ce can not recognize the matching data, it does not transmit the echo back data and waits for the matc hing data again with automatic baud rate adjust- ment. therefore, the external cont roller should transmit the matching data repeatedly till the device transmits an echo back data. the transmission repe tition count varies depending on the frequency of device. for details, refer to table 15-5. 3. the 3rd byte of the received data contains the baud ra te modification data. the five types of baud rate modification data shown in table 15-4 are available. even if baud rate is not modified, the external controller should transmit the initial baud rate data (28h: 9600 bps). 4. only when the 3rd byte of the received data contai ns the baud rate modificat ion data corresponding to the device's operating frequency, th e device echoes back data the valu e which is the same data in the 4th byte position of the received data. after the ech o back data is transmitted, baud rate modification becomes effective. if the 3rd byte of the received data does not co ntain the baud rate modification data, the device enters the halts condition after se nding 3 bytes of baud rate modification error code (62h). 5. the 5th byte of the received data contains the command data (30h) to write the flash memory. 6. when the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in table 1-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, 30h). if the 5th byte of the received da ta does not contain the op eration command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of the operation command error code (63h). 7. the 7th byte contains the data for 15 to 8 bits of the password count storage address. when the data received with the 7th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. if a receiving error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition. 8. the 9th byte contains the data for 7 to 0 bits of the password count storage address. when the data received with the 9th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. if a receiving error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition. 9. the 11th byte contains the data for 15 to 8 bits of the password comparison start address. when the data received with the 11th byte has no receiving erro r, the device does not send any data. if a receiv- ing error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition. 10. the 13th byte contains the data for 7 to 0 bits of the password comparison start address. when the data received with the 13th byte ha s no receiving error, the device does not send any data. if a receiv- ing error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition. 11. the 15th through m?th bytes contain the passwor d data. the number of passwords becomes the data (n) stored in the password count storage address. the external password data is compared with n- byte data from the address specified by the passwor d comparison start addre ss. the external control- ler should send n-byte password data to the device. if the passwords do not match, the device enters the halt condition without returning an error code to the external controller . if the addresses from ffe0h to ffffh are filled with ?f fh?, the passwords are not conpare d because the device is consid- ered as a blank product. 12. the m?th + 1 through n?th - 2 bytes of the receive d data contain the binary data in the intel hex for- mat. no received data is echoed back to the extern al controller. after receiv ing the start mark (3ah for ?:?) in the intel hex format, the device starts data record reception. ther efore, the received data except 3ah is ignored until the start mark is received. afte r receiving the start mark, the device receives the data record, that consists of data lengt h, address, reco rd type, write data and checksum. since the device starts checksum cal culation after receiving an end r ecord, the external controller should wait for the checksum afte r sending the end record. if a recei ving error or intel hex format error occurs, the device enters the halts condition without returning an error code to the external con- troller. 13. the n?th - 1 and n?th bytes contain the checksum upper and lower bytes. for details on how to calcu- late the sum, refer to " 15.8 checksum (sum) ". the checksum is calculated only when the end record is detected and no receivi ng error or intel hex format er ror occurs. after sending the end
page 165 TMP86FH46ANG record, the external controller ju dges whether the transmission is co mpleted correctly by receiving the checksum sent by the device. 14. after transmitting the checksu m, the device waits for the next operation command data. note 1: do not write only the address from ffe0h to ffffh when all flash memory data is the same. if only these area are written, the subsequent operation can not be executed due to password error. note 2: to rewrite data to flash memory addresses at whic h data (including ffh) is already written, make sure to erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
page 166 15. serial prom mode 15.6 operation mode TMP86FH46ANG 15.6.3 ram loader mode (o peration command: 60h) table 15-9 shows ram loader mode process. note 1: ?xxh 3? indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxh. for details, refer to " 15.7 error code ". note 2: refer to " 15.9 intel hex format (binary) ". note 3: refer to " 15.8 checksum (sum) ". note 4: refer to " 15.10 passwords ". note 5: if addresses from ffe0h to ffffh are filled with ?ffh?, the passwords are not compared because the device is consid- ered as a blank product. transmitting a password string is not requi red. even in the case of a blank product , it is required to specify the password count storage address and the password comparison start address. transmit these data from the external controller. if a password error occurs due to incorr ect password count storage address or password comparison start address, TMP86FH46ANG stops uart communication and enters the halt condition. therefore, when a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FH46ANG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial rom mode. note 6: after transmitting a password string, the external c ontroller must not transmit only an end record. if receiving an end record after a password string, the device may not operate correctly. note 7: if the read protection is enabled or a password error occurs, TMP86FH46ANG stops uart communication and enters the halt condition. in this case, initialize TMP86FH46ANG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial prom mode. table 15-9 ram loader mode process transfer bytes transfer data from external control- ler to TMP86FH46ANG baud rate transfer data from TMP86FH46ANG to external controller boot rom 1st byte 2nd byte matching data (5ah) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - (automatic baud rate adjustment) ok: echo back data (5ah) error: nothing transmitted 3rd byte 4th byte baud rate modification data (see table 15-4) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - ok: echo back data error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 62h 3 (note 1) 5th byte 6th byte operation command data (60h) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: echo back data (60h) error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 63h 3 (note 1) 7th byte 8th byte password count storage address bit 15 to 08 (note 4) modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 9th byte 10th byte password count storage address bit 07 to 00 (note 4) modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 11th byte 12th byte password comparison start address bit 15 to 08 (note 4) modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 13th byte 14th byte password comparison start address bit 07 to 00 (note 4) modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 15th byte : m?th byte password string (note 5) - modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted m?th + 1 byte : n?th - 2 byte intel hex format (binary) (note 2) modified baud rate modified baud rate - - n?th - 1 byte - modified baud rate ok: sum (upper byte) (note 3) error: nothing transmitted n?th byte - modified baud rate ok: sum (lower byte) (note 3) error: nothing transmitted ram - the program jumps to the start address of ram in which the first transferred data is written.
page 167 TMP86FH46ANG note 8: if an error occurs during the reception of a password address or a password string, TMP86FH46ANG stops uart com- munication and enters the halt condition. in th is case, initialize TMP86FH46ANG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial prom mode. description of ram loader mode 1. the 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and recei ved data contains the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 2. in the 5th byte of the received data contains the ram loader command data (60h). 3. when th 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in table 1-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position (in this case, 60h). if the 5th byte does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after send- ing 3 bytes of operation command error code (63h). 4. the 7th through m?th bytes of the transmitted and received data contai n the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 5. the m?th + 1 through n?th - 2 bytes of the received data contain the binary data in the intel hex for- mat. no received data is echoed back to the extern al controller. after receiv ing the start mark (3ah for ?:?) in the intel hex format, the device starts data record reception. ther efore, the received data except 3ah is ignored until the start mark is received. afte r receiving the start mark, the device receives the data record, that consists of data lengt h, address, reco rd type, write data and checksum. the writing data of the data record is written in to ram specified by address. since the device starts checksum calculation after receiving an end record, the external contro ller should wait for the check- sum after sending the end record. if a receiving error or intel hex format error occurs, the device enters the halts condition without returning an error code to the external controller. 6. the n?th - 1 and n?th bytes contain the checksum upper and lower bytes. for details on how to calcu- late the sum, refer to " 15.8 checksum (sum) ". the checksum is calculated only when the end record is detected and no receivi ng error or intel hex format er ror occurs. after sending the end record, the external controller ju dges whether the transmission is co mpleted correctly by receiving the checksum sent by the device. 7. after transmitting the checksum to the external controller, the boot program jumps to the ram address that is specified by the first received data record. note 1: to rewrite data to flash memory addresses at whic h data (including ffh) is already written, make sure to erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
page 168 15. serial prom mode 15.6 operation mode TMP86FH46ANG 15.6.4 flash memory sum out put mode (operati on command: 90h) table 15-10 shows flash memory sum output mode process. note 1: ?xxh 3? indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxh. for details, refer to " 15.7 error code ". note 2: refer to " 15.8 checksum (sum) ". description of the flash memory sum output mode 1. the 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and recei ved data contains the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 2. the 5th byte of the received data contains the command data in the flash memory sum output mode (90h). 3. when the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in table 1-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, 90h). if the 5th byte of the received da ta does not contain the op eration command data, the device enters the halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of operation command error code (63h). 4. the 7th and the 8th bytes contain the upper and lowe r bits of the checksum, respectively. for how to calculate the checksum, refer to " 15.8 checksum (sum) ". 5. after sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data. table 15-10 flash memo ry sum output process transfer bytes transfer data from external control- ler to TMP86FH46ANG baud rate transfer data from TMP86FH46ANG to external controller boot rom 1st byte 2nd byte matching data (5ah) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - (automatic baud rate adjustment) ok: echo back data (5ah) error: nothing transmitted 3rd byte 4th byte baud rate modification data (see table 15-4) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - ok: echo back data error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 62h 3 (note 1) 5th byte 6th byte operation command data (90h) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: echo back data (90h) error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 63h 3 (note 1) 7th byte - modified baud rate ok: sum (upper byte) (note 2) error: nothing transmitted 8th byte - modified baud rate ok: sum (lower byte) (note 2) error: nothing transmitted 9th byte (wait for the next operation com- mand data) modified baud rate -
page 169 TMP86FH46ANG 15.6.5 product id code output mode (operation command: c0h) table 15-11 shows product id code output mode process. note: ?xxh 3? indicates that the device enters th e halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxh. for details, refer to " 15.7 error code ". description of product id code output mode 1. the 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and r eceived data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 2. the 5th byte of the received data contains the product id code output mode command data (c0h). 3. when the 5th byte contains the operation command data shown in table 15-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte positio n of the received data (i n this case, c0h). if the 5th byte data does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of operation command error code (63h). 4. the 9th through 19th bytes contain the product id code. for details, refer to " 15.11 product id code ". table 15-11 product id code output process transfer bytes transfer data from external controller to TMP86FH46ANG baud rate transfer data from TMP86FH46ANG to external controller boot rom 1st byte 2nd byte matching data (5ah) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - (automatic baud rate adjustment) ok: echo back data (5ah) error: nothing transmitted 3rd byte 4th byte baud rate modification data (see table 15-4) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - ok: echo back data error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 62h 3 (note 1) 5th byte 6th byte operation command data (c0h) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: echo back data (c0h) error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 63h 3 (note 1) 7th byte modified baud rate 3ah start mark 8th byte modified baud rate 0ah the number of transfer data (from 9th to 18th bytes) 9th byte modified baud rate 02h length of address (2 bytes) 10th byte modified baud rate 1dh reserved data 11th byte modified baud rate 00h reserved data 12th byte modified baud rate 00h reserved data 13th byte modified baud rate 00h reserved data 14th byte modified baud rate 01h rom block count (1 block) 15th byte modified baud rate c0h first address of rom (upper byte) 16th byte modified baud rate 00h first address of rom (lower byte) 17th byte modified baud rate ffh end address of rom (upper byte) 18th byte modified baud rate ffh end address of rom (lower byte) 19th byte modified baud rate 22h checksum of transferred data (9th through 18th byte) 20th byte (wait for the next operation command data) modified baud rate -
page 170 15. serial prom mode 15.6 operation mode TMP86FH46ANG 5. after sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
page 171 TMP86FH46ANG 15.6.6 flash memory status out put mode (operati on command: c3h) table 15-12 shows flash memory status output mode process. note 1: ?xxh 3? indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxh. for details, refer to " 15.7 error code ". note 2: for the details on status code 1, refer to " 15.12 flash memory status code ". description of flash memory status output mode 1. the 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and r eceived data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 2. the 5th byte of the received data contains the flash memory status output mode command data (c3h). 3. when the 5th byte contains the operation command data shown in table 15-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte positio n of the received data (i n this case, c3h). if the 5th byte does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after send- ing 3 bytes of operation command error code (63h). 4. the 9th through 13th bytes contain the status code. for details on the status code, refer to " 15.12 flash memory status code ". 5. after sending the status code, the device wa its for the next operation command data. table 15-12 flash memory status output mode process transfer bytes transfer data from external con- troller to TMP86FH46ANG baud rate transfer data from TMP86FH46ANG to external controller boot rom 1st byte 2nd byte matching data (5ah) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - (automatic baud rate adjustment) ok: echo back data (5ah) error: nothing transmitted 3rd byte 4th byte baud rate modification data (see table 15-4) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - ok: echo back data error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 62h 3 (note 1) 5th byte 6th byte operation command data (c3h) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: echo back data (c3h) error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 63h 3 (note 1) 7th byte modified baud rate 3ah start mark 8th byte modified baud rate 04h byte count (from 9th to 12th byte) 9th byte modified baud rate 00h to 03h status code 1 10th byte modified baud rate 00h reserved data 11th byte modified baud rate 00h reserved data 12th byte modified baud rate 00h reserved data 13th byte modified baud rate checksum 2?s complement for the sum of 9th through 12th bytes 9th byte checksum 00h: 00h 01h: ffh 02h: feh 03h: fdh 14th byte (wait for the next operation com- mand data) modified baud rate -
page 172 15. serial prom mode 15.6 operation mode TMP86FH46ANG 15.6.7 flash memory read protection setting mode (operation command: fah) table 15-13 shows flash memory read protection setting mode process. note 1: ?xxh 3? indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxh. for details, refer to " 15.7 error code ". note 2: refer to " 15.10 passwords ". note 3: if the read protection is enabled for a blank product or a password error occurs for a n on-blank product, TMP86FH46ANG stops uart communication and enters the halt mode. in this case, initialize TMP86FH46ANG by the reset pin and reac- tivate the serial prom mode. note 4: if an error occurs during reception of a password addr ess or a password string, TMP86FH46ANG stops uart communi- cation and enters the halt mode. in this ca se, initialize TMP86FH46ANG by the reset pin and reactivate the serial prom mode. description of the flash memory read protection setting mode 1. the 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and r eceived data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 2. the 5th byte of the received data contains the command data in th e flash memory status output mode (fah). 3. when the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in table 1-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in table 15-13 flash memory read protection setting mode process transfer bytes transfer data from external con- troller to TMP86FH46ANG baud rate transfer data from TMP86FH46ANG to external controller boot rom 1st byte 2nd byte matching data (5ah) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - (automatic baud rate adjustment) ok: echo back data (5ah) error: nothing transmitted 3rd byte 4th byte baud rate modification data (see table 15-4) - 9600 bps 9600 bps - ok: echo back data error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 62h 3 (note 1) 5th byte 6th byte operation command data (fah) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: echo back data (fah) error: a1h 3, a3h 3, 63h 3 (note 1) 7th byte 8th byte password count storage address 15 to 08 (note 2) modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 9th byte 10th byte password count storage address 07 to 00 (note 2) modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 11th byte 12th byte password comparison start address 15 to 08 (note 2) modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 13th byte 14th byte password comparison start address 07 to 00 (note 2) modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted 15th byte : m?th byte password string (note 2) - modified baud rate modified baud rate - ok: nothing transmitted error: nothing transmitted n?th byte - modified baud rate ok: fbh (note 3) error: nothing transmitted n?+1th byte (wait for the next operation com- mand data) modified baud rate -
page 173 TMP86FH46ANG this case, fah). if the 5th byte does not contai n the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of operation command error code (63h). 4. the 7th through m?th bytes of the transmitted and received data contai n the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 5. the n'th byte contains the status to be transmitted to the external controller in the case of the success- ful read protection.
page 174 15. serial prom mode 15.7 error code TMP86FH46ANG 15.7 error code when detecting an error, the device tr ansmits the error code to the external controller, as shown in table 15-14. note: if a password error occurs, tmp86f h46ang does not transmit an error code. 15.8 checksum (sum) 15.8.1 calculation method the checksum (sum) is calculated with the sum of all bytes, and the obtain ed result is returned as a word. the data is read for each byte unit and th e calculated result is returned as a word. example: the checksum which is transmitted by executing the fl ash memory write comman d, ram loader command, or flash memory sum output command is calculated in the manner, as shown above. table 15-14 error code transmit data meaning of error data 62h, 62h, 62h baud rate modification error. 63h, 63h, 63h operation command error. a1h, a1h, a1h framing error in the received data. a3h, a3h, a3h overrun error in the received data. a1h if the data to be calculated consists of the four bytes, the checksum of the data is as shown below. b2h a1h + b2h + c3h + d4h = 02eah sum (high)= 02h sum (low)= eah c3h d4h
page 175 TMP86FH46ANG 15.8.2 calculation data the data used to calculate the ch ecksum is listed in table 15-15. table 15-15 checksum calculation data operating mode calculation data description flash memory writing mode data in the entire area of the flash memory even when a part of the flash memory is written, the checksum of the entire flash memory area (c000h to fffh) is calcu- lated. the data length, address, record type and checksum in intel hex format are not included in the checksum. flash memory sum output mode ram loader mode ram data written in the first received ram address through the last received ram address the length of data, address, record type and checksum in intel hex format are not included in the checksum. product id code output mode 9th through 18th bytes of the transferred data for details, refer to " 15.11 product id code ". flash memory status output mode 9th through 12th bytes of the tran sferred data for details, refer to " 15.12 flash memory status code " flash memory erasing mode all data in the erased area of the flash memory (the whole or part of the flash memory) when the sector erase is exec uted, only the erased area is used to calculate the checksum. in the case of the chip erase, an entire area of the flash memory is used.
page 176 15. serial prom mode 15.9 intel hex format (binary) TMP86FH46ANG 15.9 intel hex format (binary) 1. after receiving the checksum of a data record, the device waits for the start mark (3ah ?:?) of the next data record. after receiving the checksum of a data reco rd, the device ignores the data except 3ah transmitted by the external controller. 2. after transmitting the checksum of en d record, the external controller mu st transmit nothing, and wait for the 2-byte receive data (upper and lower bytes of the checksum). 3. if a receiving error or intel hex fo rmat error occurs, the device enters the halt condition without returning an error code to the external controller. the in tel hex format error occurs in the following case: when the record type is not 00h, 01h, or 02h when a checksum error occurs when the data length of an extended record (record type = 02h) is not 02h when the device receives the data reco rd after receiving an extended record (record type = 02h ) with extended address of 1000h or larger. when the data length of the end record (record type = 01h) is not 00h 15.10passwords the consecutive eight or mo re-byte data in the flash memory ar ea can be specified to the password. TMP86FH46ANG compares the data string specified to the password with the password string transmitted from the external controller. the area in which passwords can be specified is locat ed at addresses c000h to ff9fh. the area from ffa0h to ffffh can not be specified as the passwords area. if addresses from ffe0h through fff fh are filled with ?ffh?, the passw ords are not compared because the product is considered as a blank product. even in this case, the password count stor age addresses and password comparison start address must be specified. table 15-16 shows the password setting in the blank product and non- blank product. note 1: when addresses from ffe0h through ffffh are filled wi th ?ffh?, the product is re cognized as a blank product. note 2: the data including the same consecutive data (three or mo re bytes) can not be used as a password. (this causes a pass- word error data. TMP86FH46ANG transmits no data and enters the halt condition.) note 3: *: don?t care. note 4: when the above condition is not met, a password error oc curs. if a password error occurs , the device enters the halt con - dition without returning the error code. note 5: in the flash memory writing mode or ram loader mode, the blank product receives the intel hex format data immediately after receiving pcsa without receiving password strings. in this case, the subsequent processing is performed correctly because the blank product ignores the data exc ept the start mark (3ah ?:?) as the intel hex format data, even if the exter- nal controller transmits the dummy password string. however, if the dummy password string contains ?3ah?, it is detected as the start mark erroneously. the micr ocontroller enters the halt mode. if this causes the problem, do not transmit the dummy password strings. note 6: in the flash memory erasing mode, t he external controller must not transmit the password string for the blank product. table 15-16 password setting in the blank product and non-blank product password blank product (note 1) non-blank product pnsa (password count storage address) c000h pnsa ff9fh c000h pnsa ff9fh pcsa (password comparison start address) c000h pcsa ff9fh c000h pcsa ffa0 - n n (password count) *8 n password string setting not required (note 5) required (note 2)
page 177 TMP86FH46ANG figure 15-5 password comparison 15.10.1password string the password string transmitted from th e external controller is compared w ith the specified data in the flash memory. when the password string is not matched to the data in the flash memory, the device enters the halt condition due to the password error. 15.10.2handling of password error if a password error occurs, the device enters the halt c ondition. in this case, reset the device to reactivate the serial prom mode. 15.10.3password management during program development if a program is modified many times in the development stage, confusion may arise as to the password. therefore, it is recommended to use a fixed password in the program development stage. example :specify pnsa to f000h, and the pa ssword string to 8 bytes from address f001h (pcsa becomes f001h.) password section code abs = 0f000h db 08h : pnsa definition db ?code1234? : password string definition 08h 01h 02h 03h 04h 05h 08h f012h f107h f108h flash memory f109h f10ah f10bh f10ch uart f0h 12h f1h 07h 01h 02h 03h 04h 05h 06h 07h 08h pnsa pcsa password string 06h 07h f10dh f10eh "08h" becomes the umber of passwords 8 bytes compare example pnsa = f012h pcsa = f107h password string = 01h,02h,03h,04h,05h 06h,07h,08h rxd pin
page 178 15. serial prom mode 15.11 product id code TMP86FH46ANG 15.11product id code the product id code is the 13-byte data containing the start address and the end address of rom. table 15-17 shows the product id code format. 15.12flash memory status code the flash memory status code is the 7-byte data including the read protection status and the status of the data from ffe0h to ffffh. table 15-18 shows the flash memory status code. table 15-17 product id code format data description in the case of TMP86FH46ANG 1st start mark (3ah) 3ah 2nd the number of transfer data (10 bytes from 3rd to 12th byte) 0ah 3rd address length (2 bytes) 02h 4th reserved data 1dh 5th reserved data 00h 6th reserved data 00h 7th reserved data 00h 8th rom block count 01h 9th the first address of rom (upper byte) c0h 10th the first address of rom (lower byte) 00h 11th the end address of rom (upper byte) ffh 12th the end address of rom (lower byte) ffh 13th checksum of the transferred data (2?s compliment for the sum of 3rd through 12th bytes) 22h table 15-18 flash memory status code data description in the case of TMP86FH46ANG 1st start mark 3ah 2nd transferred data count (3rd through 6th byte) 04h 3rd status code 00h to 03h (see figure below) 4th reserved data 00h 5th reserved data 00h 6th reserved data 00h 7th checksum of the transferred data (2?s compliment for the sum of 3rd through 6th data) 3rd byte 00h 01h 02h 03h checksum 00h ffh feh fdh status code 1 76543210 rpena blank (initial value: 0000 00**)
page 179 TMP86FH46ANG some operation commands are limited by the flash memory stat us code 1. if the read pr otection is enabled, flash memory writing mode command and ram loader mode co mmand can not be executed. erase all flash memory before executing these command. note: m : the command can be executed. pass: the command can be executed with a password. : the command can not be executed. (after echoing the command back to the exter nal controller, TMP86FH46ANG st ops uart communication and enters the halt condition.) rpena flash memory read pro- tection status 0: 1: read protection is disabled. read protection is enabled. blank the status from ffe0h to ffffh. 0: 1: all data is ffh in the area from ffe0h to ffffh. the value except ffh is included in the area from ffe0h to ffffh. rpena blank flash memory writing mode ram loader mode flash memory sum output mode product id code output mode flash memory status output mode flash memory erasing mode read protec- tion setting mode chip erase sec- tor erase 00 mmmmmm 0 1 pass pass mmm pass pass 10 mmmm 11 mmm pass pass
page 180 15. serial prom mode 15.13 specifying the erasure area TMP86FH46ANG 15.13specifying the erasure area in the flash memory erasing m ode, the erasure area of the flas h memory is specified by n ? 2 byte data. the start address of an erasure area is specified by erasta, and the end address is specified by eraend. if erasta is equal to or smaller than eraend, the sector erase (erasure in 4 kbyte units) is executed. executing the sector erase while the read protection is enabled results in an infinite loop. if erasta is larger than eraend, th e chip erase (erasure of an entire flash memory area) is executed and the read protection is disabled. therefore, execute the chip erase (not sector erase) to disable the read protection. note: when the sector erase is executed for the area contai ning no flash cell, TMP86FH46ANG stops the uart commu- nication and enters the halt condition. 15.14port input control register in the serial prom mode, the input level is fixed to the all ports except p03 and p02 ports with a hardware feature to prevent overlap current to unused ports. (all port inpu ts and peripheral function inputs shared with the ports become invalid.) therefore, to access to the flash memory in the ram load er mode without uart communication, port inputs must be valid. to make port inputs valid, set the pin of the port input contro l register (spcr) to ?1?. the spcr register is not operated in the mcu mode. erasure area specification data (n ? 2 byte data) 76543210 erasta eraend erasta the start address of the erasure area 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111: from 0000h from 1000h from 2000h from 3000h from 4000h from 5000h from 6000h from 7000h from 8000h from 9000h from a000h from b000h from c000h from d000h from e000h from f000h eraend the end address of the erasure area 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111: to 0fffh to 1fffh to 2fffh to 3fffh to 4fffh to 5fffh to 6fffh to 7fffh to 8fffh to 9fffh to afffh to bfffh to cfffh to dfffh to efffh to ffffh
page 181 TMP86FH46ANG note 1: the spcr register can be read or written only in the seri al prom mode. when the write instruction is executed to the spcr register in the mcu mode, the port input control can not be performed. when the read instruction is executed for the spcr register in the mcu mode, read data of bit7 to 1 are unstable. note 2: all i/o ports except p03 and p02 po rts are controlled by the spcr register. port input control register spcr (0feah) 76543210 pin (initial value: **** ***0) pin port input control in the serial prom mode 0 : invalid port inputs (the input level is fixed with a hardware feature.) 1 : valid port inputs r/w
page 182 15. serial prom mode 15.15 flowchart TMP86FH46ANG 15.15flowchart start setup receive uart data receive data = 5ah adjust the baud rate (adjust the source clock to 9600 bps) no yes transmit uart data (transmit data = 5ah) receive uart data modify the baud rate based on the receive data receive data = 30h (flash memory writing mode) receive data = 60h (ram loader mode) receive uart data (intel hex format) transmit uart data (checksum of an entire area) receive uart data transmit uart data (transmit data = 60h) receive uart data (intel hex format) jump to the start address of ram program transmit uart data (checksum of an entire area) receive data = c0h (product id code output mode) transmit uart data (transmit data = c0h) flash memory write process ram write process transmit uart data (product id code) transmit uart data (echo back the baud rate modification data) verify the password (compare the receive data and flash memory data) read protection check protection disabled read protection check protection disabled infinite loop infinite loop ng protection enable ng receive data = c3h (flash memory status output mode) transmit uart data (transmit data = c3h) receive data = f0h (flash memory erasing mode) transmit uart data (transmit data = f0h) infinite loop ng chip erase (erase on entire area) transmit uart data (checksum of an entire area) receive data = fah (read protection setting mode) transmit uart data (transmit data = fah) read protection setting read protection check blank product check infinite loop ng blank product check blank product check non-blank product non-blank product ok blank product ok blank product check non-blank product ok ok blank product check non-blank product blank product protection enable blank product disable read protection blank product receive uart data receive data sector erase (block erase) upper 4 bits x 1000h to lower 4 bits x 1000h transmit uart data (checksum of the erased area) upper 4 bits > lower 4 bits transmit uart data (transmit data = 30h) transmit uart data (transmit data = 90h) receive data = 90h (flash memory sum output mode) verify the password (compare the receive data and flash memory data) transmit uart data (checksum) verify the password (compare the receive data and flash memory data) verify the password (compare the receive data and flash memory data) transmit uart data (status of the read protection and blank product) transmit uart data (transmit data = fbh) read protection check upper 4 bits < lower 4 bits protection enabled infinite loop protection disabled
page 183 TMP86FH46ANG 15.16uart timing table 15-19 uart timing-1 (vdd = 4.5 to 5.5 v, fc = 2 to 16 mhz, topr = -10 to 40c) parameter symbol clock frequency (fc) minimum required time at fc = 2 mhz at fc = 16 mhz time from matching data reception to the echo back cmeb1 approx. 930 465 s58.1 s time from baud rate modification data reception to the echo back cmeb2 approx. 980 490 s61.3 s time from operation command reception to the echo back cmeb3 approx. 800 400 s 50 s checksum calculation time cksm approx. 7864500 3.93 s 491.5 s erasure time of an entire flash memory ceall - 30 ms 30 ms erasure time for a sector of a flash memory (in 4-kbyte units) cesec - 15 ms 15 ms table 15-20 uart timing-2 (vdd = 4.5 to 5.5 v, fc = 2 to 16 mhz, topr = -10 to 40c) parameter symbol clock frequency (fc) minimum required time at fc = 2 mhz at fc = 16 mhz time from the reset release to the acceptance of start bit of rxd pin rxsup 2100 1.05 ms 131.3 ms matching data transmission interval cmtr1 28500 14.2 ms 1.78 ms time from the echo back of matching data to the acceptance of baud rate modification data cmtr2 380 190 s 23.8 s time from the echo back of baud rate modification data to the acceptance of an operation command cmtr3 650 325 s 40.6 s time from the echo back of operation command to the acceptance of password count storage addresses (upper byte) cmtr4 800 400 s50 s reset pin rxd pin rxsup (5ah) cmeb1 (5ah) cmtr2 (28h) (28h) cmeb2 cmtr3 (30h) (30h) cmeb3 cmtr4 txd pin rxd pin txd pin (5ah) (5ah) (5ah) cmtr1
page 184 15. serial prom mode 15.16 uart timing TMP86FH46ANG
page 185 TMP86FH46ANG 16. input/output circuitry 16.1 control pins the input/output circuitries of the TMP86FH46ANG control pins are shown below. note: the test pin of the TMP86FH46ANG does not have a pull-down resistor. fix the test pin at low-level. control pin i/o input/output circuitry remarks xin xout input output resonator connecting pins (high-frequency) r f = 1.2 m ? (typ.) r o = 1.5 k ? (typ.) xtin xtout input output resonator connecting pins (low-frequency) r f = 6 m ? (typ.) r o = 220 k ? (typ.) reset i/o hysteresis input pull-up resistor r in = 220 k ? (typ.) r = 1 k ? (typ.) test input without pull-down resistor r = 1 k ? (typ.) fix the test pin at low-level fc rf r o osc. enable xin xout vdd vdd fs rf r o osc. enable xtin xten xtout vdd vdd                 r vdd
page 186 16. input/output circuitry 16.2 input/output ports TMP86FH46ANG 16.2 input/output ports port i/o input/output circuitry remarks p0 i/o sink open drain output high current output hysteresis input r = 100 ? (typ.) p1 i/o tri-state i/o hysteresis input r = 100 ? (typ.) p2 i/o sink open drain output high current output hysteresis input r = 100 ? (typ.) p3 i/o tri-state i/o r = 100 ? (typ.) p4 i/o tri-state i/o high current output (nch) r = 100 ? (typ.)  
       
         
         
      
         
         
       
page 187 TMP86FH46ANG 17. electrical characteristics 17.1 absolute maximum ratings the absolute maximum ratings are rated values which must not be exceeded during operat ion, even for an instant. any one of the ratings must not be exceeded. if any absolute maximum rati ng is exceeded, a device may break down or its performance may be degraded, causi ng it to catch fire or explode resul ting in injury to the user. thus, when designing products which include this de vice, ensure that no absolute maximu m rating value will ever be exceeded. (vss = 0 v) parameter symbol pins ratings unit supply voltage v dd -0.3 to 6.5 v input voltage v in -0.3 to v dd + 0.3 v output voltage v out1 -0.3 to v dd + 0.3 v output current (per 1 pin) i out1 p1, p3, p4 ports -1.8 ma i out2 p1, p3 ports 3.2 i out3 p0, p2, p4 ports 30 output current (total) i out1 p1, p3 ports 60 i out2 p0, p2, p4 ports 80 power dissipation [topr = 85 c] p d 250 mw soldering temperature (time) tsld 260 (10 s) c storage temperature tstg -55 to 125 operating temperature topr -40 to 85
page 188 17. electrical characteristics 17.1 absolute maximum ratings TMP86FH46ANG 17.2 recommended op erating conditions the recommended operating co nditions for a device are operating conditions under which it can be guaranteed that the device will operate as specified. if the device is us ed under operating conditions other than the recommended operating conditions (supply voltage, operating temperature range, specified ac/dc values etc.), malfunction may occur. thus, when designing products which include this device, ensure that the r ecommended operating conditions for the device are always adhered to. 17.2.1 serial prom mode 17.2.2 mcu mode (except flas h programming or erasing) (v ss = 0 v, topr = -10 to 40 c) parameter symbol pins condition min max unit supply voltage v dd normal1, 2 modes 4.5 5.5 v input high voltage v ih1 except hysteresis input v dd 4.5 v v dd 0.70 v dd v ih2 hysteresis input v dd 0.75 input low voltage v il1 except hysteresis input v dd 4.5 v 0 v dd 0.30 v il2 hysteresis input v dd 0.25 clock frequency fc xin, xout 2.0 16.0 mhz (v ss = 0 v, topr = -40 to 85 c) parameter symbol pins ratings min max unit supply voltage (condition 1) v dd fc = 16 mhz normal1, 2 modes idle0, 1, 2 modes 4.5 5.5 v fc = 8 mhz normal1, 2 modes idle0, 1, 2 modes 3.0 fs = 32.768 khz slow1, 2 modes sleep0, 1, 2 modes stop mode supply voltage (condition 2) (note1) fc = 8 mhz normal1, 2 modes idle0, 1, 2 modes 2.7 3.0 fs = 32.768 khz slow1, 2 modes sleep0, 1, 2 modes stop mode input high level v ih1 except hysteresis input v dd 4.5 v v dd 0.70 v dd v v ih2 hysteresis input v dd 0.75 v ih3 v dd < 4.5 v v dd 0.90 input low level v il1 except hysteresis input v dd 4.5 v 0 v dd 0.30 v il2 hysteresis input v dd 0.25 v il3 v dd < 4.5 v v dd 0.10 clock frequency fc xin, xout v dd = 2.7 to 3.0v (note1) 1.0 8.0 mhz v dd = 3.0 to 5.5v v dd = 4.5 to 5.5v 16.0 fs xtin, xtout v dd = 2.7 to 3.0v (note1) 30.0 34.0 khz v dd = 3.0 to 5.5v note 1: when the supply voltage v dd is less than 3.0 v, the operating temperature topr must be in a range of -20 c to 85 c.
page 189 TMP86FH46ANG 17.2.3 mcu mode (flash programming or erasing) (v ss = 0 v, topr = -10 to 40 c) parameter symbol pins ratings min max unit supply voltage v dd normal1, 2 modes 4.5 5.5 v input high level v ih1 except hysteresis input v dd 4.5 v v dd 0.70 v dd v ih2 hysteresis input v dd 0.75 input low level v il1 except hysteresis input v dd 4.5 v 0 v dd 0.30 v il2 hysteresis input v dd 0.25 clock frequency fc xin, xout 1.0 16.0 mhz
page 190 17. electrical characteristics 17.1 absolute maximum ratings TMP86FH46ANG 17.3 dc characteristics note 1: typical values show those at topr = 25 c and v dd = 5 v. note 2: input current i in1 : the current through pull-down resistor is not included. note 3: i dd does not include i ref . note 4: the supply currents of slow2 and sleep2 modes are equivalent to those of idle0, idle1 and idle2 modes. note 5: when a program is executing in the flash memory or w hen data is being read from the flash memory, the flash memory operates in an intermittent manner, causing peak curr ents in the operation current, as shown in figure 17-1. in this case, the supply current i dd (in normal1, normal2 and slow1 modes) is defined as the sum of the average peak current and mcu current. note 6: when designing the power supply, make sure that p eak currents can be supplied. in slow1 mode, the difference between the peak current and the average current becomes large. (v ss = 0 v, topr = -40 to 85 c) parameter symbol pins condition min typ. max unit hysteresis voltage v hs hysteresis input v dd = 5.5 v, v in = 5.5 v/0 v ?0.9? v input current i in1 test ??2 a i in2 sink open drain, tri?state port i in3 reset , stop input resistance r in2 reset pull?up v dd = 5.5 v, v in = 0 v 100 220 450 k ? output leakage current i lo1 sink open drain port v dd = 5.5 v, v out = 5.5 v ??2 a i lo2 tri?state port v dd = 5.5 v, v out = 5.5 v/0 v ??2 output high voltage v oh tri?state port v dd = 4.5 v, i oh = -0.7 ma 4.1 ? ? v output low voltage v ol except xout, p3, p5 v dd = 4.5 v, i ol = 1.6 ma ??0.4 output low curren i ol high current port (p3, p5 port) v dd = 4.5 v, v ol = 1.0 v ?20?ma supply current in normal1, 2 modes i dd v dd = 5.5 v v in = 5.3 v/0.2 v fc = 16 mhz fs = 32.768 khz when a program operates on flash memory (note5,6) ?12.618 ma when a program operates on ram (flsstb=0) ?6.59 supply current in idle 0, 1, 2 modes ?4.56.5 supply current in slow1 mode v dd = 3.0 v v in = 2.8 v/0.2 v fs = 32.768 khz when a program operates on flash memory (note5,6) ? 20.0 50.0 a when a program operates on ram (flsstb=0) ? 14.0 28.0 when a program operates on ram (flsstb=1) ?9.0? supply current in sleep1 mode ?5.015.0 supply current in sleep0 mode ?4.013.0 supply current in stop mode v dd = 5.5 v v in = 5.3 v/0.2 v ?0.510 peak current for slow1 mode (note5,6) i ddp-p v dd = 5.5 v ?10? ma v dd = 3.0 v ?2?
page 191 TMP86FH46ANG figure 17-1 intermittent operation of flash memory n program coutner (pc) n+1 n+2 n+3 1 machine cycle (4/fc or 4/fs) mcu current i [ma] ddp-p typ. current momentary flash current max. current sum of average momentary flash current and mcu current
page 192 17. electrical characteristics 17.1 absolute maximum ratings TMP86FH46ANG 17.4 ad characteristics note 1: the total error includes all errors except a quanitization error, and is defined as a maximum deviation from the ideal c on- version line. note 2: conversion time is defferent in recommended value by power supply voltage. note 3: the voltage to be input on the ain input pin must not exceed the range between v aref and v ss . if a voltage outside this range is input, conversion values will become unstable and conversion values of other channels will also be affected. note 4: analog reference voltage range: ? v aref = v aref - v ss note 5: when ad converter is not us ed, fix the avdd and varef pin on the v dd level. (v ss = 0.0 v, 4.5 v v dd 5.5 v, topr = -40 to 85 c) paramete symbol condition min typ. max unit analog reference voltage v aref a vdd - 1.0 ? a vdd v power supply voltage of analog control circuit a vdd v dd a vss v ss analog reference voltage range (note 4) ? v aref 3.5 ? ? analog input voltage v ain v ss ? v aref power supply current of analog refer- ence voltage i ref v dd = a vdd = v aref = 5.5 v v ss = a vss = 0.0 v ?0.61.0ma non linearity error v dd = a vdd = 5.0 v, v ss = a vss = 0.0 v v aref = 5.0 v ??2 lsb zero point error ??2 full scale error ??2 total error ??2 (v ss = 0 v, 3.0 v v dd < 4.5 v, topr = -40 to 85 c) parameter symbol condition min typ. max unit analog reference voltage v aref a vdd - 1.0 ? a vdd v power supply voltage of analog control circuit a vdd v dd a vss v ss analog reference voltage range (note 4) ? v aref 2.5 ? ? analog input voltage v ain v ss ? v aref power supply current of analog refer- ence voltage i ref v dd = a vdd = v aref = 4.5 v v ss = a vss = 0.0 v ?0.50.8ma non linearity error v dd = a vdd = 3.0 v v ss = a vss = 0.0 v v aref = 3.0 v ??2 lsb zero point error ??2 full scale error ??2 total error ??2 (v ss = 0 v, 2.7 v v dd < 3.0 v, topr = -20 to 85 c) (note6) parameter symbol condition min typ. max unit analog reference voltage v aref a vdd - 0.5 ? a vdd v power supply voltage of analog control circuit a vdd v dd a vss v ss analog reference voltage range (note 4) ? v aref 2.5 ? ? analog input voltage v ain v ss ? v aref power supply current of analog refer- ence voltage i ref v dd = a vdd = v aref =2.7 v v ss = a vss = 0.0 v ?0.30.5ma non linearity error v dd = a vdd = 2.7 v v ss = a vss = 0.0 v v aref = 2.7 v ??2 lsb zero point error ??2 full scale error ??2 total error ??2
page 193 TMP86FH46ANG note 6: when the supply voltage v dd is less than 3.0 v, the operating temperature topr must be in a range of -20 c to 85 c.
page 194 17. electrical characteristics 17.6 flash characteristics TMP86FH46ANG 17.5 ac characteristics note 1: when the supply voltage v dd is less than 3.0 v, the operating temperature topr must be in a range of -20 c to 85 c. 17.6 flash characteristics 17.6.1 write characteristics (v ss = 0 v, 4.5 v v dd 5.5 v, topr = -40 to 85 c) parameter symbol condition min typ. max unit machine cycle time tcy normal1, 2 modes 0.25 ? 4 s idle0, 1, 2 modes slow1, 2 modes 117.6 ? 133.3 sleep0, 1, 2 modes high-level clock pulse width t wch for external clock operation (xin input) fc = 16 mhz ? 31.25 ? ns low-level clock pulse width t wcl high-level clock pulse width t wsh for external clock operation (xtin input) fs = 32.768 khz ? 15.26 ? s low-level clock pulse width t wsl (v ss = 0 v, 3.0 v v dd < 4.5 v, topr = -40 to 85 c) (note1) (v ss = 0 v, 2.7 v v dd < 3.0 v, topr = -20 to 85 c) (note1) paramete symbol condition min typ. max unit machine cycle time t cy normal1, 2 modes 0.5 ? 4 s idle0, 1, 2 modes slow1, 2 modes 117.6 ? 133.3 sleep0, 1, 2 modes high-level clock pulse width t wch for external clock operation (xin input) fc = 8 mhz ? 62.5 ? ns low-level clock pulse width t wcl high-level clock pulse width t wsh for external clock operation (xtin input) fs = 32.768 khz ? 15.26 ? s low-level clock pulse width t wsl (v ss = 0 v) paramete condition min typ. max. unit number of guaranteed writes to flash memory v ss = 0 v, topr = -10 to 40 c ? ? 100 times
page 195 TMP86FH46ANG 17.7 recommended osc illating conditions note 1: to ensure stable oscillation, the re sonator position, load capacitance, etc. must be appropriate. because these factors are greatly affected by board patterns, please be sure to evaluate operation on the board on which the device will actually be mounted. note 2: when using the device (oscillator) in places exposed to high elec tric fields such as cathode-ray tubes, we recommend electrically shielding the package in order to maintain normal operating condition. note 3: the product numbers and specifications of the resonators by murata manufacturing co., ltd. are subject to change. for up-to-date information, please refer to the following url: http://www.murata.com 17.8 handling precaution - the solderability test conditions for lead-free produc ts (indicated by the suffix g in product name) are shown below. 1. when using the sn-37pb solder bath solder bath temperature = 230 c dipping time = 5 seconds number of times = once r-type flux used 2. when using the sn-3.0ag-0.5cu solder bath solder bath temperature = 245 c dipping time = 5 seconds number of times = once r-type flux used note: the pass criteron of the above test is as follows: solderability rate until forming 95 % - when using the device (oscillator) in plac es exposed to high electric fields such as cathode-ray tubes, we recommend elec- trically shielding the package in order to maintain normal operating condition. xtin xtout (2) low-frequency oscillation xin xout c 1 c 2 (1) high-frequency oscillation c 1 c 2
page 196 17. electrical characteristics 17.8 handling precaution TMP86FH46ANG
page 197 TMP86FH46ANG 18. package dimension p-sdip42-600-1.78 unit: mm
page 198 18. package dimension TMP86FH46ANG
this is a technical document that de scribes the operating functi ons and electrical specif ications of the 8-bit microcontroller series tlcs-870/c (lsi). toshiba provides a variety of development tools a nd basic software to enable efficient software development. these development tools have specifi cations that support advances in microcomputer hardware (lsi) and can be used extensively. both the hardware and so ftware are supported continuous ly with version updates. the recent advances in cmos lsi production technology have be en phenomenal and microcomputer systems for lsi design are constant ly being improved. the products described in this document may also be revised in the future. be sure to check the latest specific ations before using. toshiba is developing highly integrated, high-perfo rmance microcomputers using advanced mos production technology and especially well proven cmos technology. we are prepared to meet the requests for custom packaging for a variet y of application areas. we are confident that our products can satisfy your application needs now and in the future.


▲Up To Search▲   

 
Price & Availability of TMP86FH46ANG

All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022  

[Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy]
Mirror Sites :  [www.datasheet.hk]   [www.maxim4u.com]  [www.ic-on-line.cn] [www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net] [www.alldatasheet.com.cn] [www.gdcy.com]  [www.gdcy.net]


 . . . . .
  We use cookies to deliver the best possible web experience and assist with our advertising efforts. By continuing to use this site, you consent to the use of cookies. For more information on cookies, please take a look at our Privacy Policy. X